Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident, or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only). www.chrysler.com/en/owners (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) provides special offers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries, personalized service records and more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often. Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.

Download a FREE electronic copy of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, media and warranty booklet by visiting: www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. residents); PACIFICA HYBRID PACIFICA www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents). CHRYSLER PACIFICA HYBRID Chrysler.com (U.S.) (Canada) 2018 USER GUIDE Chrysler.ca FIRST EDITION • USER GUIDE 18RUPHEV-926-AA • 18RUPHEV-926-AA

©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly acquainted with your new Chrysler brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that common questions. However, it is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual. may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation For complete operational instructions, maintenance procedures and important safety messages, please consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous manuals found on the website on the back cover and other Warning Labels in your vehicle. and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws. www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Chrysler brand dealer.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL: Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired IMPORTANT: Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/ with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca or use public transportation. (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle. WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US This User Guide has been prepared to help you LLC US FCA FROM WELCOME LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision quickly become acquainted with the important fea- workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. tures of your vehicle. It contains most things you will need to operate and maintain the vehicle, including ALWAYS drive safely and pay attention to the road. emergency information. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steer- ing wheel. Youhave full responsibility and assume all For complete owner information, refer to your risks related to the use of the features and applica- Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ tions in this vehicle. Only use the features and ap- owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or plications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for further information. For your convenience, the may result in an accident involving serious injury or information contained on this site may also be death. printed and saved for future reference. This guide illustrates and describes the operation of FCA US LLC is committed to protecting our envi- features and equipment that are either standard or ronment and natural resources. By converting from optional on this vehicle. This guide may also include paper to electronic delivery for the majority of the a description of features and equipment that are no user information for your vehicle, together we longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. greatly reduce the demand for tree-based products Please disregard any features and equipment de- and lessen the stress on our environment. scribed in this guide that are not available on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make When it comes to service, remember that your au- thorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has changes in design and specifications and/or make factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® additions to or improvements to its products with- parts, and cares about your satisfaction. out imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.

1 HOW TO USE THIS In addition, the User Guide has been conceived Symbols considering vehicles with steering wheel on the left Some vehicle components have colored labels MANUAL side; it is therefore possible that on vehicles with whose symbols indicate precautions to be observed steering wheel on the right side, the position or Essential Information when using this component. construction of some controls is not exactly mirror- Each time direction instructions (left/right or like with respect to the figure. forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are given, WARNINGS AND Toidentify the chapter with the information needed these must be intended as regarding an occupant in CAUTIONS you can consult the index at the end of this User the driver's seat. Special cases not complying with Guide. While reading this User Guide you will find a series this rule will be properly specified in the text. of WARNINGS to be followed to prevent incorrect Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated use of components which could cause accidents or The figures in this User Guide are provided by way graphic tabs, at the side of each odd page. A few injuries. of example only: this might imply that some details pages further there is a key for getting to know the of the image do not correspond to the actual ar- chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. There are also CAUTIONS that must be followed rangement of your vehicle. There is anyway a textual indication of the current to prevent against procedures that could result in chapter at the side of each even page. damage to your vehicle. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

2 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SAFETY STARTING AND OPERATING IN CASE OF EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS MULTIMEDIA CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE INDEX 4 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS INSTRUMENTPANEL...... 6 INTERIOR...... 7

5 INSTRUMENT PANEL

Instrument Panel GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 — Air Vents 5 — Glove/Storage Compartment 2 — Multifunction Lever 6 — Ignition Start/Stop Button 3 — Instrument Cluster 7 — Steering Wheel 4 — Windshield Wiper Lever

6 INTERIOR

Interior Features 1 — Power Window/Door Lock Switches 4 — Switch Panel 2 — Electronic Gear Selector 5 — Door Handle 3 — Uconnect Radio 6 — Seats

7 8 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY ...... 11 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — STEERING WHEEL ...... 43 HIGH VOLTAGE CHARGING IF EQUIPPED ...... 29 Tilt/TelescopingSteering Column ...... 43 OPERATION...... 12 ToArm The System ...... 29 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped .....44 SAE J1772 Charging Inlet...... 12 ToDisarm The System ...... 30 MIRRORS...... 45 AC Level 1 Charging (120V, 15 Amp) ...... 12 DOORS ...... 30 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...... 45 AC Level 2 Charging (240V, 30 Amp) ...... 15 Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry ...... 30 Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped ...... 45 Charging Times...... 16 Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped .....33 EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 46 Vehicle Charge Indicators ...... 16 Hands-Free Sliding Doors — If Equipped ....35 Hybrid Electric Pages ...... 17 Multifunction Lever ...... 46 SEATS...... 36 Headlight Switch ...... 46 VEHICLE USER GUIDE — Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ...... 36 IF EQUIPPED ...... 20 Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .....46 Heated Seats ...... 37 High/Low Beam Switch ...... 46 KEYS...... 22 Ventilated Seats — If Equipped...... 38 Automatic High Beam — If Equipped ...... 47 KeyFob...... 22 Easy Entry Slide Second Row Seating ...... 38 Flash-To-Pass ...... 47 IGNITION SWITCH ...... 26 Fold-Flat ...... 39 Automatic Headlights ...... 47 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — Second Row Removable Seat ...... 39 Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped . . .48 IF EQUIPPED ...... 28 Manually Folding Third Row Seats — Headlight Delay — If Equipped ...... 48 If Equipped ...... 40 How ToUse Remote Start ...... 28 Lights-On Reminder ...... 48 ToEnter Remote Start Mode...... 29 HEAD RESTRAINTS ...... 40 Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ...... 48 General Information ...... 29 Head Restraints — Front Seats ...... 41 Turn Signals...... 49 Head Restraints — Second Row ...... 42 Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ...... 49 Head Restraints — Third Row ...... 42 Battery Protection ...... 49 9 INTERIOR LIGHTS...... 49 Operating Tips ...... 62 HOOD ...... 65 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND TRI-PANE PANORAMIC SUNROOF — Opening ...... 65 WASHERS...... 50 IF EQUIPPED ...... 63 Closing ...... 66 Front Wiper Operation...... 50 Opening Sunroof ...... 63 LIFTGATE ...... 67 Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ...... 51 Closing Sunroof ...... 64 Power Liftgate — If Equipped ...... 67 Rear Wiper And Washer ...... 51 Wind Buffeting ...... 64 Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped ...... 68 Power Sun Shade — If Equipped ...... 64 CLIMATECONTROLS...... 52 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT...... 69 Overview ...... 52 Pinch Protect Feature ...... 65 Power Outlets ...... 69 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — Sunroof Maintenance...... 65 Power Inverter — If Equipped...... 71 If Equipped ...... 57 Ignition Off Operation ...... 65 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

10 HIGH VOLTAGE High Voltage Battery Service Disconnect NOTE: BATTERY The High Voltage Battery Service Disconnect is • During vehicle start up and shut down a clicking located under the access panel, in front of the sec- noise may be heard from within the vehicle. When Your vehicle is equipped with a Lithium-ion high ond row passenger seating. the ignition is in the ON position, the high voltage voltage battery that is used to power the electric battery contactors inside the battery are closed to powertrain systems and the 12 volt vehicle electrical If your vehicle requires high voltage battery service, make the stored electricity inside available for ve- system. see your authorized dealer. hicle use. The clicking noise heard is the sound of these contactors as they open and close during The high voltage battery is located under the WARNING! normal operation. middle section of the vehicle, below and in front of the second row seating. The high voltage battery is Never try to remove the high voltage service • In extreme temperatures, high or low, the High maintenance free and designed to last for the life of disconnect. The high voltage service disconnect Voltage Battery may need to be conditioned and the vehicle. is used when your vehicle requires service by a therefore may require the vehicle to be plugged- trained technician at an authorized dealer. Fail- in. When the vehicle is not plugged-in, the follow- Lithium-ion batteries provide the following ben- ure to follow this warning can cause severe burns ing message, “Plug In Vehicle for Battery Condi- efits: or electrical shock that may result in serious in- tioning” might appear in the instrument cluster • Lithium-ion batteries are much lighter than other jury or death. display. When the High Voltage Battery is not types of rechargeable batteries of the same size. ready to crank the vehicle at start up, due to con- Disposal of the High Voltage Battery • Lithium-ion batteries hold their charge; they only ditions including extreme temperatures, the mes- lose approximately 3 percent of their charge per Your vehicle’s high voltage battery is designed to sage “Battery Conditioning Leave Ignition In Run” month. last the life of your vehicle. See your authorized will be displayed in the instrument cluster display. Keep the ignition in the ON/RUN position for the dealer for information on the disposal of the battery • Lithium-ion batteries have no memory, which battery to recover. Switch the ignition back to the if it should require replacement. means that you do not have to completely dis- OFF position when the message disappears, and charge them before recharging, as with some then start the vehicle. When the “Battery Condi- other batteries. tioning Leave Ignition in Run” message is dis- • Lithium-ion batteries can be recharged and dis- played on the instrument cluster display, do not charged thousands of times. operate any air conditioning controls. 11 • Under cold or hot temperatures, while the vehicle HIGH VOLTAGE AC Level 1 Charging (120V, 15 Amp) is plugged-in and the ignition is in the OFF posi- tion, the vehicle may wake-up to pre-condition the CHARGING OPERATION Your vehicle is equipped with a 120 Volt AC, SAE high voltage battery for usage. J1772 Level 1 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment SAE J1772 Charging Inlet (EVSE), also referred to as a charging cord set. AC • It is recommended that the vehicle be plugged-in Level 1 charging requires a conventional NEMA over night where possible to maximize the electric Your vehicle uses an industry standard SAE 5-15 120 Volt AC grounded wall receptacle along range of the vehicle. J1772 charge inlet (vehicle charge inlet) for both AC Level 1 (120V) and AC Level 2 (240V) charg- with the portable charging cord set provided with The message will only be displayed when the igni- ing. the vehicle. tion is in the RUN position, or if there was a failed attempt to achieve PSA (Propulsion System Avail- able) when the High Voltage Battery cell tempera- tures are either too cold, or too hot.

Vehicle Charge Inlet GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Portable Charging Cord Set (EVSE)

12 Charging Cordset Operation WARNING! WARNING! 1. Plug the AC plug of the charging cordset into a Shock, fire, property damage, or personal injury • Read all the instructions before using this 15 A, or 20 A, 120 VAC, 60 Hz, grounded wall may occur if the Portable EVSE Cordset is not product. receptacle. Do not use an extension cord, outlet/ used properly. There are no serviceable parts • Unattended children must not have access to plug adapter, or a worn outlet. The charging contained in the Portable EVSE Cordset. Any the working Portable EVSE Cordset. cordset will not operate safely unless it is plugged attempt to service it may result in shock, fire, • Do not put fingers or objects into the Charge directly into the wall receptacle. property damage, or personal injury. Connector. • Do not use this product if the flexible power NOTE: To access the portable charging cord set, open the cord or Electric Vehicle (EV) Cable is frayed, The EVSE should be plugged into a dedicated door of the cargo area storage bin, on the driver’s broken, has cracked insulation or any other circuit, not a circuit shared with other devices side, and remove the charging cord set from the signs of damage. drawing electricity on the circuit. storage bag. • Do not use this product if the enclosure or the NOTE: Charge Connector is broken, cracked, open, After use, the EVSE should be placed in the carrier or shows any other indication of damage. bag and put back to the cargo area storage bin. • Do not use Portable EVSE Cordset with an extension cord. Use of an extension cord may NOTE: cause burns, fire, or other damage or injury. The portable charging cord set is used for AC Level • This device may attempt to reset and run after 1 charging only. an interruption

AC Plug And Wall Receptacle

13 2. Check to see if the charging cordset is ready to 3. If the charging cordset is ready to charge, ensure WARNING! charge by reviewing the indicator lights. After a the vehicle is in PARK, and then connect the Improper connection of the equipment- brief self-check, where the indicator light will charge connector to the vehicle’s charge inlet. grounding conductor could result in a risk of flash, a green AC indicator light and two green Youwill hear a “click” when the charge connector electric shock. Check with a qualified electrician “charge active” indicator lights indicate that the is inserted correctly and coupled with the vehi- or serviceman if you are in doubt as to whether cordset is ready for use. cle’s charge inlet. the wall receptacle is properly grounded. Do not 4. When the vehicle commences charging, the modify the plug provided with the product – if it Charge Active Indicator Lights will cycle from does not fit the outlet, you must have a proper left to right, and then both turn off. This pattern outlet installed by a qualified electrician. will repeat while the vehicle is charging. The lights are illuminated at the rate of approxi- mately one cycle per second. NOTE: The vehicle should start charging automati- cally. If not, please check the following: • Charging Cordset - The charging cordset sta- tus indicators illuminate green or red to iden- tify the charging cordset status. Cordset Indicator Lights • Wall Receptacle – Check whether the wall receptacle is functional (no power outage) 1 — AC Power Indicator Light GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE and/or plug the charging cordset into a differ- 2 — Fault Indicator Light ent wall receptacle. 3 — Charge Rate Indicator Lights

14 • Charging Schedule – Check whether or not AC Level 2 Charging (240V, 30 Amp) If not, please check the following: the charging schedules have been enabled. If AC Level 2 (240 V) charging requires a 240 V,Level • Charging Station – Check the indications and in- enabled, check that you are within the sched- 2 EVSE (Charging station). A 30 A Level 2 EVSE structions at the charging station or uled time and day of the week. If a charging for home installation is recommended. schedule has been enabled in the vehicle, and • Charging Schedule – Check whether the charging schedule is enabled and if so, whether the vehicle is it is outside the time and day of the week, you When using public charging stations, ensure the currently within the scheduled charge time/day may override the schedule for this charging charging station is ready to provide charge and the (weekday/weekend). If the charging schedule is event by plugging in the charge connector, vehicle is in PARK before the charge connector is enabled within the vehicle, you may override them unplugging it, and then plugging it back into plugged into the vehicle’s charge inlet. Youwill hear for this charging event by plugging in the charge a “click” when the charge connector is inserted cor- the vehicle charge inlet. Complete the double connector, unplugging it, and then plugging it rectly and is coupled with the vehicle’s charge inlet. plug sequence within ten seconds for it to back into the vehicle charge inlet. Complete the The vehicle should start charging automatically. If override the set schedule. double plug sequence within ten seconds for it to not, please check the instructions at the charging 5. To stop the charging process, disconnect the override the set schedule. station. vehicle side connector first and then the charg- Tostop the charging process: ing cordset from the wall receptacle. To disen- NOTE: gage the vehicle coupler, press the button on the The vehicle should start charging automatically. • Press the “STOP” button located on the front of the EVSE station. charge connector first and then remove the con- nector from the vehicle charge inlet. • Press the button on the charge connector first and 6. Close the inlet door when an EVSE is not con- then remove the connector from the vehicle charge inlet nected to the vehicle. • Plug the charge handle into the EVSE station and NOTE: coil the charging cord onto its holder. Do not leave It is good practice to keep the ignition in the OFF the charging cord laying on the ground. position while conducting Level 1 Charging. This minimizes any additional vehicle loads the EVSE has to support. The additional electrical loads will extent the High Voltage Battery charging time. 15 Charging Times NOTE: Vehicle Charge Indicators The following factors determine the time it takes to • The charging times below are estimates based on Instrument Cluster High Voltage Battery charge the high voltage battery: charging a high voltage battery that has a 0% Display SOC value displayed in the instrument cluster. • The high voltage battery’s current state of charge There is a battery display indicator located on the • Charging times will vary based on the age, condi- • The type of EVSE used (Level 1 - 120V or Level 2 instrument cluster. The battery display will display tion, state of charge, available current being pro- the current state of charge for the high voltage – 240V) vided to the charger from its energy source, and battery; with the percentage value located to the • Ambient temperature temperature of the high voltage battery. left of the symbol. When plugged in, the battery • Whether the vehicle is ON during charging • Charging times may be longer if a thermal self- symbol also gives the battery level along with mes- protection reduces the charging current from the sages about the charge or whether the system is EVSE. waiting to charge due tot he charge schedule. • If the vehicle’s ignition is in either the ACC or These will appear unless there is a charging fault. A RUN position, the vehicle charge indicator may red plug telltale will be shown in the cluster, as well not indicate greater than a 99% state of charge, as applicable messaging when charging. and will continue to charge the vehicle, due to the vehicle loads. Estimated Charge Type of EVSE Time Level 1 (120V/15A) Approximately 14 hours Level 2 (240V/30A) Approximately 2 hours GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

High Voltage Battery Gauge

16 Instrument Panel State Of Charge Indicator In the event of an error in the charging process the Hybrid Electric Pages In addition to the battery display, your vehicle is outer two lights will blink. Within your Uconnect 4C/4C NAV radio is the equipped with a visual state of charge indicator. The Number Of Indicator Percent Of “Hybrid Electric Pages” App that allows you to see state of charge indicator is made up of five lights Lights Illuminated Battery Charge your vehicle’s power flow, understand your drive that are mounted to the top center of the instru- 1st light blinks 0 – 20% history, and set an EVSE charging schedule for your ment panel, which will illuminate when the vehicle is 1st light ON, second light 21 – 40% vehicle’s high voltage battery. To access this app, plugged into the EVSE. blinks press the “Apps” button on the main menu bar of 1st and 2nd lights ON, 41 – 60% the radio’s touch screen, and locate the “Hybrid 3rd light blinks Electric” App. Pressing the “Hybrid Electric Pages” 1st, 2nd, and 3rd light ON, 61 – 80% App will bring you to a set of three pages: Power 4th light blinks Flow, Driving History, and Charging Schedule 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th light 81 – 99% ON, 5th light blinks All 5 lights ON 100% Two outer lights are blinking Indicates an error in the charging process. State Of Charge Indicator Lights turn on one at a time Indicates system The state of charge indicator provides a visual indica- from left to right (when is waiting for tion of the high voltage battery’s charge status during looking at the front of the scheduled time in charging. It’s also used to indicate a charging problem, vehicle) charge schedule to as well as, waiting for a schedule charge to begin. begin charging All lights light up, and then Indicates a NOTE: turn off immediately successful plug-in. The lights scroll one at a time when the vehicle is plugged in outside of its charging schedule time/ day of the week, and it is waiting on the schedule to begin charging. 17 Hybrid Electric Pages App Location

Power Flow cooling, power vehicle electrical loads, and charge • Climate - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the the High VoltageBattery. Engine operation is con- climate control system is using to maintain the The first screen within the “Hybrid Electric Pages” trolled to maximize fuel economy. current interior temperature. App is the Power Flow screen. The Power Flow screen shows the current power readings for all of • Battery - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE the following: high voltage battery is currently providing/ absorbing. A negative kW indicates the vehicle’s • Engine - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the high voltage battery is charging. engine is generating. Based on vehicle operating conditions, this power is used to: propel the ve- hicle, provide passenger compartment heating & 18 On the bar graph, miles (km) driven on the same ‘Weekdays’ or ‘Weekends’ schedule to adjust the day in Electric mode (battery only) are always start and end time of desired charging. Youcan also shown below miles (km) driven in Hybrid mode. choose “Charge Until Full” instead of choosing an When one day of the week exceeds 100 miles end time, allowing the vehicle to continue to charge (160 km) driven, the values of miles (km) driven in for an amount of time after the start time until the Electric and Hybrid modes will be listed above the vehicle is fully charged, as long as the vehicle is bar graph in respective colors (teal for Electric and plugged in. The Charging Schedule can also be set blue for Hybrid). using the Uconnect App on your smartphone.

NOTE: If the charging schedule is not enabled, the vehicle Power Flow Screen will charge whenever plugged in. It is not necessary to set up the charging schedule to charge the ve- Power Flow paths are indicated by the direction of hicle. the arrows on the touchscreen. Driving History The second screen in the “Hybrid Electric Pages” App is the Driving History screen. The Driving Driving History Screen History screen shows the miles (km) driven in both Full Electric and Hybrid modes for both the previ- Charging Schedule ous week and the current week. The data is dis- played in a bar graph: Electric Mode miles in teal The third screen within the “Hybrid Electric Pages” and Hyrbid Mode miles in blue. App is the Charging Schedule screen. From this screen you can set when you want you vehicle to Charging Schedule Screen charge. To do so, press the check box next to the setting “Enable Schedule” until a check mark ap- pears in the box, from there you can push the 19 NOTE: The charging schedule can also be overridden if the Pre-Installed Features If the vehicle is plugged in outside of the charging EVSE is plugged in, unplugged, and then plugged • Your User Guide — • Available when and schedule set in the Uconnect 4C radio, the vehicle’s in a second time to the vehicle. This “double Updated in real- where you need it battery will not charge. Charging will only begin plugged-in” feature will override the schedule that is time immediately if the vehicle is plugged in within the set in the radio, and begin charging the vehicle • Touchscreen • Customizable time and day of the week set in the schedule. Oth- immediately. The double plug sequence must be convenience interface completed within ten seconds for it to override the erwise, charging will automatically begin when the • Maintenance • Multilingual programed schedule. selected charge time/day of the week occurs or schedules and whenever the vehicle is plugged in with no charge information schedule set. VEHICLE USER GUIDE — • Comprehensive icon & symbol glossary If the vehicle is turned off outside of the charging IF EQUIPPED window, a radio pop-up message will be displayed, Access your Owner’s Information right through which provides an option to begin charging the your Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen system vehicle immediately. The pop-up message asks the — If Equipped. driver if they would like to “Charge Now?” and Toaccess the VehicleUser Guide on your Uconnect provides other information, including the next Touchscreen: Press the Uconnect Apps button, charging schedule start time and estimated time to then press the Vehicle User Guide icon on your charge the battery to 100%. If within one hour of touchscreen. No Uconnect registration is required. selecting “Yes,” the vehicle is connected to a pow- ered EVSE, the vehicle will immediately begin to NOTE: charge (temporarily ignoring any set charge sched- Vehicle User Guide features are not available while GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ule). To fully deactivate the charge schedule, refer the vehicle is moving. If you try to access while the to the “Charging Schedule” feature within the “Hy- vehicle is in motion, the system will display: Feature not available while the vehicle is in motion. brid Electric Pages” App.

20 Vehicle User Guide Home Screen

Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you will Features/Benefits • Crucial driver information and assistance: be able to explore your warranty information and • Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen radio • Operating • Maintenance radio manual when and where you need them. Your Instructions Schedules • Enhanced search and browsing capability Uconnect radio will display the Vehicle User Guide • Warranty • Emergency on your touchscreen radio to assist in better under- • Robust NAV application — If Equipped Information Procedures standing your vehicle. There’s no app to download, • Add selected topics to a fast-access Favorites • Fluid Level • 911 Contact no phone to connect and no external device needed category Standards and More for playback. Plus, it’s updated throughout the year, • Icon and symbol glossary in real-time, so it never goes out of date. • Warranty information 21 Tip: When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add KEYS it to your Favorites, for easy access in the future. Key Fob Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition system consists of a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/STOP push button ignition system. The Remote Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob and Keyless Enter- N-Go feature if equipped. NOTE: The key fob may not be found if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal. Icon And Symbol Glossary This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate, activate the Panic Alarm, optional power liftgate, left power sliding door, and right Enhanced Search And Browsing Capability power sliding door from distances up to approxi- mately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held key fob. The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. NOTE: GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. The emergency key is also for locking/ unlocking the glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking. 22 ToUnlock The Doors NOTE: Uconnect Settings lets you program the system to unlock either the driver's side doors on the first push (default) or unlock all doors on the first push of the unlock button on the key fob. To change the default setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual at https://www.mopar.com/ en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for further information. 1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks Key Fob Push and release the unlock button on the key fob First Push Unlock once to unlock the driver front door and sliding door 1 — Unlock or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and 2nd Push Of Key Fob Unlocks 2—Lock 3 — Remote Start liftgate. The hazard lights will flash to acknowledge Push and release the unlock button on the key fob 4 — Right Power Sliding Side Door the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and 5 — Panic Alarm be activated. liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowl- 6 — Emergency Key edge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry sys- 7 — Left Power Sliding Side Door tem will be activated. 8 — Liftgate NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Getting ToKnow Your Vehicle” for further information.

23 Emergency Key Feature To remove the emergency key, press the mechani- Request For Additional Remote Controls cal button on the side of the key fob with your The key fob also contains and an emergency key, NOTE: thumb and pull the emergency key out with your which stores in the bottom of the key fob. Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle other hand while pushing the mechanical button. electronics can be used to start and operate the ToLock The Doors And Liftgate vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all doors and liftgate. The hazard lights will flash once and the horn will chirp once to acknowl- CAUTION! edge the signal. Settings in radio can change to • Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle lights only, chirp only, or both. and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to unattended. “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Getting • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter- ToKnow Your Vehicle” for further information. N-Go — Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position. Key Fob With Remote Control And Integrated Vehicle Key Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an Mechanical Latch ToRelease If one or more doors are open or the liftgate is open, authorized dealer. This procedure consists of pro- Emergency Key the doors can be locked. This is signaled by a quick gramming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. flash of the turn signals. A blank key fob is one that has never been pro- The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle grammed. should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go — GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE dead. The emergency key is also for locking/ Passive Entry NOTE: unlocking the glove compartment. You can keep If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System the emergency key with you when valet parking. open, the doors can be locked. The doors will un- serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho- lock again only if the key is inside the passenger rized dealer. compartment. 24 KeySense Features — If Equipped Start Up Display Features General Information This feature provides the vehicle owner with the • Unique splash screen graphic The following regulatory statement applies to all ability to customize vehicle settings that can be • Telltale illuminated radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this ve- applied to determine the driving experience for hicle: • After unique splash screen, and after stored mes- other drivers of the vehicle. The vehicle settings are sages are cycled, then start-up KeySense mes- This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules protected by a unique 4-digit PIN, which the vehicle sages (Range & Max Speed) are displayed and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS stan- owner creates when accessing the specific settings dard(s). Operation is subject to the following two for the first time. The following features are always enabled when this conditions: key is in use: This feature also has additional features that are 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, • Entertainment Audio Muted if 1st row occupied always enabled when the specific key is in use that and cannot be set by the vehicle owner. While this spe- Seat Belts are not Fastened 2. This device must accept any interference re- cific key fob is in use, the vehicle will respond ac- • Consistent Seat Belt Unfastened Chime cordingly to the customized vehicle settings and ceived, including interference that may cause • Maximum Radio Volume limited to 15 out of 39 mandatory features. This includes enhanced driving undesired operation. • Daytime Running Lights assistance features, increased driver alerts, and the NOTE: locking of certain optional features. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Changes or modifications not expressly approved KeySense Unique Splash Screen Owner’s Manual at https://www.mopar.com/en-us/ by the party responsible for compliance could void care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or the user’s authority to operate the equipment. At start-up the KeySense splash screen should in- www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for form the driver that the vehicle will be functioning in further information. KeySense mode when the KeySense key is in use.

25 IGNITION SWITCH NOTE: The ignition can be placed in the following posi- tions: • Pushing ignition Start/Stop button may only acti- This feature allows the driver to start the vehicle vate the Electric Propulsion System and not start OFF with the push of a button, as long as the key fob is in the vehicle. "READY" will show in cluster when- the passenger compartment, and the drivers foot • The vehicle is stopped. ever vehicle is operating in EV (Electric Vehicle) on the brake pedal. Mode and the vehicle is stationary. • Some electrical devices are available. NOTE: • If the vehicle ignition is in either ACC or RUN, the ACC This vehicle is equipped with an automatic shut- vehicle charge indicator may not display a value • Some electrical devices are available. down feature. If the vehicle is left in “READY” state greater than 99% state of charge due to vehicle • Mechanical power (Vehicle Propulsion) is not (vehicle running) with shifter in “PARK” for one loads. available. hour, it will automatically turn off the vehicle. Noti- fications have been designed into this feature to ON/RUN raise awareness of the timed event. The instrument • Driving position. cluster display will display “Ready to drive” accom- • All the electrical devices are available. panied with three audible chimes while exiting. The interior warnings will occur regardless if the key fob START remains in the vehicle or is removed. The horn will • As long as the "Ready" appears in the instrument sound three times if the fob is removed from the cluster display it does not matter if the engine is vehicle and the ignition state is in “READY” mode. running or not, vehicle propulsion is available. Torestart the vehicle, follow the normal process for starting your vehicle. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operat- ing positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position. The three positions are Keyless Push Button Ignition OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start RUN will illuminate. 26 Conditions Causing Engine ToRun WARNING! • Maintaining Hybrid Battery SOC A child or others could be seriously or fatally • Provide Maximum Vehicle Acceleration injured. Children should be warned not to • Provide Maximum Passenger Compartment touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the Heating gear selector. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the • Maintain Exhaust System Catalyst Temperature vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil- (after engine start in current ignition cycle - dren, and do not leave the ignition of a ve- emissions requirement) hicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in • Engine Temporarily Operating in “Fuel and Oil the RUN mode. A child could operate power Maintenance Mode” windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. • Do not leave children or animals inside • Hood Opened with Ignition in Run Post-Start parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat Mode (eliminate unexpected engine start-ups) Keyless Push Button Ignition build-up may cause serious injury or death. In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or WARNING! CAUTION! dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always re- side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob from the vehicle and lock your move the key from the ignition and lock all the key fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button vehicle. doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. and push to operate the ignition switch. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- tended is dangerous for a number of reasons.

27 NOTE: The Remote Starting System also activates the Cli- • Key fob PANIC button not pushed If the brake is pressed and the ignition is placed in mate Control, vented seats (if equipped) in tem- • System not disabled from previous remote start the RUN position with an EVSE connected to the peratures above 80° F (26.7° C), the optional event vehicle, the instrument cluster will not display the heated seats, optional heated steering wheel, op- Ready state. When the Electric Vehicle Supply tional heated mirrors and rear defroster in tempera- • Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing Equipment (EVSE) is unplugged from the vehicle, tures below 40° F (4.4° C). • Ignition in STOP/OFF position the vehicle will go into the “Ready” state. If the • Fuel level meets minimum requirement vehicle is not shifted out of Park 30 minutes after NOTE: being unplugged, the vehicle will disable the • Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob • MIL lamp is OFF, Vehicle is in propulsion system “Ready” state. After an additional 30 minutes with may reduce this range. active no change in Ignition status, the Ignition shall go to • While plugged in the remote start feature for the OFF and the vehicle shall power down. For further vehicle may not always start the engine. Tempera- WARNING! information, refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And Operating" for further information, ture dependent. • Do not start or run an engine in a closed How ToUse Remote Start garage or confined area. Exhaust gas con- REMOTE STARTING tains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odor- All of the following conditions must be met before less and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poi- SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED the vehicle will remote start: sonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled. NOTE: • Gear Selector in PARK Remote start on Hybrid while plugged in may • Keep key fobs away from children. Opera- • Doors closed not always start the engine. Temperature depen- tion of the Remote Start System, windows, dent. • Hood closed door locks or other controls could cause se-

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE rious injury or death. This system uses the key fob to start • Liftgate closed the vehicle conveniently from outside • Hazard switch off the vehicle while still maintaining se- curity. The system has a range of • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed) 328 ft (100 m). • 12 volt battery at an acceptable charge level 28 ToEnter Remote Start Mode General Information VEHICLE SECURITY Push and release the Remote Start button on the The following regulatory statement applies to all ALARM — IF EQUIPPED key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this ve- will lock, the turn signals will flash twice, and the hicle: The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle horn will chirp twice. Then the vehicle will start, and doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is acti- and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS stan- a 15-minute cycle. vated, the interior switches for door locks, power dard(s). Operation is subject to the following two sliding doors and power liftgate are disabled. The NOTE: conditions: vehicle security alarm provides both audible and • The vehicle can be started two consecutive times 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, visible signals. If something triggers the alarm, the (two 15-minute cycles) from the key fob. However, and vehicle security alarm will provide the following au- dible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi- 2. This device must accept any interference re- lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the vehicle tion before you can repeat the start sequence for a ceived, including interference that may cause security light in the instrument cluster will flash. third cycle. undesired operation. • The park lamps will turn on and remain on during ToArm The System Remote Start mode. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm: • For security, power window operation is disabled by the party responsible for compliance could void when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. 1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the the user’s authority to operate the equipment. “OFF” position (refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And Operating" for further information). • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter- N-Go — Passive Entry, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.

29 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you the vehicle: position. remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will – For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter- sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security • Push lock on the interior power door lock N-Go — Passive Entry, push the keyless ig- alarm. switch with the driver and/or passenger door nition START/STOP button (requires at open. If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery least one valid key fob in the vehicle). becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm • Push the lock button on the exterior Passive will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob avail- NOTE: the exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. able in the same exterior zone (refer to "Key- • The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm. less Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry" in "Get- button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the ting To Know Your Vehicle" for further vehicle security alarm. information). DOORS • The vehicle security alarm remains armed during • Push the lock button on the key fob. power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry will not disarm the vehicle security alarm. If some- 3. If any doors are open, close them. The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the one enters the vehicle through the liftgate and vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a fea- opens any door, the alarm will sound. ToDisarm The System ture of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using • When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without any of the following methods: interior power door lock switches will not unlock having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. the doors. • Push the unlock button on the key fob. NOTE: The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle • Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Re-

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE your vehicle. However, you can create conditions (if equipped, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go — fer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of Passive Entry" in "Getting ToKnow YourVehicle" Owner’s Manual at https://www.mopar.com/ the previously described arming sequences has oc- for further information). en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) curred, the vehicle security alarm will arm regardless • Hands Free Liftgate passive entry activation (if or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) equipped with Hands Free Liftgate passive entry). for further information. 30 • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been ToUnlock From The Driver's Side: NOTE: raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver’s the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a doors and liftgate will unlock when you grab hold of door handle, grab the driver’s front door handle to slower response time. the driver’s front door handle. To select between unlock the drivers side doors (driver/sliding door) “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All • If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no automatically. The interior door panel rocker knob door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings” in will rotate when the door is unlocked. re-lock and if equipped will arm the security alarm. “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual at https://www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html • The sliding side doors can be unlocked from the (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Cana- outside using the hands free or Passive Entry sys- dian Residents) for further information. tem. • The key fob may not be able to be detected by the ToUnlock From The Passenger Side: vehicle keyless-go system if it is located next to a With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; passenger door handle, grab the front passenger these devices may block the key fob’s wireless door handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate signal and prevent the passive entry system from automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will locking or unlocking or starting the vehicle. rotate when the door is unlocked. • If set by the customer in the Uconnect Settings, NOTE: unlocking with Passive Entry will initiate illumi- All doors will unlock when the front passenger door nated approach (low beams, license plate lamp, handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door position lamps) for the time 0, 30(default), 60 or unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st 90 seconds. Passive Entry also initiates two flashes Grab The Door Handle ToUnlock of the turn lamps. Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).

31 Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Key Fob In When any of these situations occur, after all open ToEnter The Liftgate Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe) doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be ex- With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, ecuted. If it finds a key fob inside the car, and it does To minimize the possibility of unintentionally lock- cycle the handle to open the liftgate and pull the not find any key fob outside the car, then the car will ing a key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry liftgate open with one fluid motion. unlock and alert the customer. system is equipped with an automatic door unlock NOTE: feature which will function if the ignition switch is in NOTE: If “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” is programmed, the OFF position. The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid only the liftgate will unlock when the liftgate release key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no valid FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive handle is pulled. If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is key fob is detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle Entry. There are three situations that trigger a programmed, all doors and the liftgate will unlock will not unlock the doors when any of the following FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle: when the liftgate release handle is pulled. Toselect conditions are met: • A lock request is made by a valid key fob while a between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Un- door is open. • The doors are manually locked using the door lock lock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Set- knobs. tings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual at • A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door https://www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ handle while a door is open. • There is a valid key fob outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry door owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or • A lock request is made by the door panel switch handle. www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for while the door is open. further information. • Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch and then close the doors. NOTE: On the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE key fob can be locked in the vehicle.

32 ToLock The Vehicle’s Doors Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the door handle button. This could unlock the door(s). key fob lock button, or the lock button located on With one of the vehicle’s key fobs within 5 ft (1.5 m) the vehicle’s interior door panel. of the driver or passenger front door handle, push the door handle lock button to lock all four doors Power Sliding Side Door — and the liftgate. If Equipped The power sliding door may be power opened or closed in several ways: • Key fob • Inside or outside handles • Buttons located: – In the overhead console – Just inside the sliding door – On the outside handle Push the button on the key fob twice within five Do Not Grab The Door Handle seconds to open, close, or reverse a power sliding When Locking door. NOTE: Push The Door Handle Button ToLock • After pushing the door handle button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking. • The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob battery is dead. 33 The key fob and the overhead console button will operate the door when the door is locked. All other ways require the sliding door to be unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pressing the button on the outside handle or Hands-Free feature (if equipped) will unlock and open the sliding door, with a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle.

Key Fob Right Side Control Buttons Overhead Console Control Buttons

There are power sliding side door switches located on the B-Pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door for the rear seat passengers. To operate the sliding door manually with the handles or to avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding doors from the rear seats, push the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Key Fob Left Side Control Buttons power sliding door power off button, located in the overhead console, to remove power to the handles and buttons just inside the sliding doors. The power off LED, in the overhead console, will be lit when

34 the handles are manual. When the LED is lit, push- To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors, use a ing the power sliding door power off button will WARNING! straight in and out kicking motion under the vehicle return the handles to power operation. Before driving off, check the instrument cluster in the general location below the door handle(s). for a sliding door or door open message or warn- Do not move your foot sideways or in a sweeping NOTE: ing indicator. Failure to do this could result in motion or the sensors may not detect the motion. Tones are sounded when the sliding door reverses unintentionally leaving the sliding door open movement and upon activation of the hands-free When a valid kicking motion is completed, the slid- while driving. feature (if so equipped). The turn signals are ing door will chime, the hazard lights will flash and flashed with sliding door movements. These alerts Hands-Free Sliding Doors — the sliding door will open almost instantaneously. This assumes all options are enabled in the radio can be turned on or off in ‘Uconnect Settings’. If Equipped settings. NOTE: NOTE: • If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while it is closing or opening, the door will auto- • To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors requires a matically reverse to the closed or open position, valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the provided it meets sufficient resistance. door handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is not within 5 ft (1.5 m), the door will not respond to any • If the power sliding door stops in the middle due to kicks. obstacles, it powers open on the next command. • The Hands-Free Sliding Door will only operate WARNING! when the transmission is in PARK. • If anything obstructs the Hands-Free sliding doors Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if while it is opening, the sliding doors will automati- caught in the path of the sliding door. Make sure Hands-Free Sliding Doors cally reverse to the closed position, provided it the door path is clear before closing the door. meets sufficient resistance. • If the power sliding doors encounters multiple ob- structions within the same cycle, the system will automatically stop. 35 The Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature may be Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) Manual Rear Seat Adjuster turned off through Uconnect Settings. Refer to Both second row seats are adjustable forward or “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s WARNING! rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is Manual at https://www.mopar.com/en-us/ located under the seat cushion at the front edge of care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or • Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is each seat. www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat further information. The Hands-Free Sliding Doors could cause you to lose control. The seat belt feature should be turned off during Jacking, Tire might not be adjusted properly and you could Changing, and Vehicle Service. be injured. Adjust the seat only while the ve- hicle is parked. SEATS • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System your chest. In a collision you could slide under of the vehicle. the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle WARNING! is parked.

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or Manual Seat Adjuster outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people rid- While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and ing in these areas are more likely to be seri- slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar ously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your once you have reached the desired position. Then, vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat using body pressure, move forward and rearward on GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. latched. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

36 To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, and • Press the heated seat button once to turn the WARNING! push back to the desired position and release the HI setting ON. lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the • Adjusting a seat while driving may be danger- • Press the heated seat button a second time to seatback to its normal position. Using body pres- ous. Moving a seat while driving could result in turn the LO setting ON. sure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to be loss of control which could cause a collision sure the seatback has latched. • Press the heated seat button a third time to and serious injury or death. turn the heating elements OFF. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Se- WARNING! If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will rious injury or death could result from a poorly automatically switch to LO-level after approxi- Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the adjusted seat belt. mately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that shoulder belt is no longer resting against your time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicat- chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat Manual Recline ing the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF belt, which could result in serious injury or death. automatically after approximately 45 minutes. Heated Seats NOTE: Front Heated Seats — If Equipped • Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes. The front heated seats control buttons are located • The vehicle must be running for the heated seats within the climate or controls screen of the touch- to operate. screen. Youcan choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings. The indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Twoindicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for OFF. Recline Lever

37 Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start Ventilated Seats — If Equipped Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start, the Located in the first row seat cushions are small fans On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated seats can be programmed to come on dur- that draw the air from the passenger compartment ventilated seats can be programed to come on ing a remote start. and move air through fine perforations in the seat during a remote start. cover to help keep the driver and front passenger This feature can be programmed through the This feature can be programmed through the cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in operate at two speeds, HI and LO. Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner's Manual at “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html The front ventilated seats control buttons are lo- www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Cana- cated within the climate or controls screen of the (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Cana- dian Residents). touchscreen. dian Residents) for further information. • Press the ventilated seat button once to WARNING! choose HI. Easy Entry Slide Second Row Seating The second row seats can be tilted and slid forward • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin • Press the ventilated seat button a second time for easy entry into the third row. because of advanced age, chronic illness, dia- to choose LO. betes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol • Press the ventilated seat button a third time to 1. Located in the seatback of the second row seat is use, exhaustion or other physical condition turn the ventilated seat OFF. a lever that provides easier access to the third must exercise care when using the seat heater. row by tilting the seat forward. NOTE: It may cause burns even at low temperatures, The vehicle must be running for the ventilated seats especially if used for long periods of time to operate. • Do not place anything on the seat or seatback

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over- heated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.

38 Fold-Flat 3. The release strap is located on the front of the seat, near the floor. To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward position and push the seatback forward until it rests on the seat cushion. NOTE: The seatback may lock into the fold flat position. Use the recline lever to unlock the seatback. Second Row Removable Seat The Easy Entry Slide second row seating does not stow in the floor, but they are removable for added cargo space. Removing Seat Easy Tilt Lever 1. Adjust seat to the full rearward position. 2. Slide lever upwards to unlock the seatback. 2. Lift the recline lever to fold the seatback flat Seat Release Strap 3. Push on seatback to slide seat forward to access against the seat cushion. the third row. 4. To remove the seat, pull the release strap to NOTE: 4. To put the seat back into original position, just release the rear latches. Push downward on the seatback to make sure it pull back on the seatback and lock the seat into 5. Tilt the back of the seat to the upward position. is in the locked position. position. 6. The seat assembly can now be removed from WARNING! the vehicle. Grab the front seatback edge lo- cated near the head restraint and the grab bar on Do not use this feature with a child in seat. the rear side of the seat cushion for easy Serious injury or death my occur. removal.

39 Reinstalling Seat Manually Folding Third Row Seats — WARNING! 1. Toreinstall the seat, align the seats front attach- If Equipped • Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its ments into the detent positions on the floor. 1. Lower the center head restraint down to the lowered position could result in serious injury 2. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seat back into its seatback by pushing the button on the guide and or death in a collision. Always make sure the original position. pushing the head restraint down. head restraints are in their upright positions NOTE: 2. Pull release strap marked “1” to release the when the seat is to be occupied. Push downward to ensure the rear latches are in anchors. the locked position. 3. Pull release strap marked “2” and tumble the seat HEAD RESTRAINTS 3. Lift the recline handle and return the seat back to rearward into the storage bin. Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of the seating position. injury by restricting head movement in the event of ToUnfold Third Row Seats a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so WARNING! 1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the that the top of the head restraint is located above storage bin and push the seat forward until the the top of your ear. If not properly latched, the seat could become anchors latch. loose. Personal injuries could result. WARNING! 2. Pulling strap “2” releases the seatback to return to its full upright position. • All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until 3. Raise the head restraint to its upright position. the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck WARNING! injury in the event of a crash.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE • Head restraints should never be adjusted • In a collision, you or others in your vehicle while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly with the head restraints improperly adjusted latched to their floor attachments. Always be or removed could cause serious injury or sure the seats are fully latched. death in the event of a collision.

40 Head Restraints — Front Seats NOTE: Toremove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can The front driver and passenger seats are equipped go. Then, push the release button and the adjust- with four-way head restraints. ment button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.

WARNING!

• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious in- Forward Adjustment jury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Al- ways securely stow removed head restraints in Toraise the head restraint, pull upward on the head a location outside the occupant compartment. restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the ad- • ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled Front Head Restraint justment button, located at the base of the head in the vehicle to properly protect the occu- 1 — Release Button restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. pants. Follow the re-installation instructions 2 — Adjustment Button Front head restraints are also adjustable forward above prior to operating the vehicle or occu- and rearward. To adjust the head restraint forward, pying a seat. pull forward on the top of the head restraint to desired position. To adjust the head restraint rear- ward, pull forward on the head restraint to furthest forward position and head restraint will reset to furthest rearward position. 41 Head Restraints — Second Row NOTE: Head Restraints — Third Row Toremove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can The second row outboard head restraints are ad- The outboard head restraints can be manually go then push the release button and the adjustment justable. Toraise the head restraint, pull upward on folded forward for improved rearward visibility. Pull button at the base of each post while pulling the the head restraint. Tolower the head restraint, push the release strap to fold them forward. head restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be the adjustment button, located at the base of the adjusted to fully remove the head restraint. Torein- head restraint, and push downward on the head stall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts restraint. into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.

WARNING!

• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious in- jury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Al- ways securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compart- ment. • ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled Release Strap in the vehicle to properly protect the occu- pants. Follow the re-installation instructions NOTE: above prior to operating the vehicle or occu-

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Second Row Head Restraint pying a seat. • The head restraints must be raised manually when occupying the third row. 1 — Release Button 2 — Adjustment Button • Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third row seats.

42 The head restraint in the center position can be STEERING WHEEL raised and lowered for tether routing or height ad- justment. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in Tilt/TelescopingSteering Column “Safety” for further information. This feature allows you to tilt the steering column NOTE: upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen Toremove the center head restraint, raise it as far as or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping it can go. Then, push the release button and the lever is located left of the steering wheel at the end adjustment button at the base of each post while of the steering column. pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then, using the adjustment button, adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.

Center Head Restraint 1 — Adjustment Button 2 — Release Button

Tilt/TelescopingLever

43 To unlock the steering column, push the lever Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering The steering wheel contains a heating element that On models that are equipped with remote start, the column, move the steering wheel upward or down- helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated heated steering wheel can be programmed to come ward as desired. Tolengthen or shorten the steering steering wheel has only one temperature setting. column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it on during a remote start through the Uconnect Once the heated steering wheel has been turned inward as desired. To lock the steering column in system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime- on, it will operate for an average of 80 minutes or position, push the lever upward until fully engaged. dia” in the Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/ more before automatically shutting off. This time en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or may vary depending on the temperature of the WARNING! www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for environment. The heated steering wheel can shut further information. Do not adjust the steering column while driving. off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel Adjusting the steering column while driving or is already warm. WARNING! driving with the steering column unlocked, could The heated steering wheel control button is located cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. within the Uconnect system. Youcan gain access to • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin Failure to follow this warning may result in seri- the control button through the climate screen or the because of advanced age, chronic illness, dia- ous injury or death. controls screen. betes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions • Press the heated steering wheel button once must exercise care when using the steering to turn the heating element on. wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low • Press the heated steering wheel button a temperatures, especially if used for long peri- second time to turn the heating element off. ods. • Do not place anything on the steering wheel NOTE: that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The vehicle must be running for the heated steering steering wheel covers of any type and mate- wheel to operate. rial. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.

44 MIRRORS Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if Heated Mirrors — If Equipped the following occurs: • The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding. These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This • The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/ feature will be activated whenever you turn on the unfolded. rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Cli- mate Controls” for further information. • The mirrors come out of the unfolded position. • The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped speeds. The switch for the power folding mirrors is located To reset the power folding mirrors: fold and unfold between the power mirror switches L (left) and R them by pushing the button (this may require mul- (right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will tiple button pushes). This resets them to their nor- fold in, pushing the switch a second time will return Power Folding Mirror Switch mal position. the mirrors to the normal driving position. NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph (16 km/ h), the folding feature will be disabled. If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they will automatically unfold.

45 EXTERIOR LIGHTS Headlight Switch Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the second detent for parking light and instrument panel light Multifunction Lever The headlight switch is located on the left side of operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the third the instrument panel. The switch controls the op- detent for headlight, parking light and instrument eration of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel operation. panel lights, interior lights and the fog lights. Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped The headlights or LED light bars on your vehicle will illuminate when the vehicle is started. This pro- vides a constant lights on condition until the ignition is turned OFF. If the parking brake is applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn off. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate. High/Low Beam Switch Multifunction Lever When the headlights are turned on, pushing the The multifunction lever is located on the left side of Headlight Switch multifunction lever toward the instrument panel will the steering column. The multifunction lever con- 1 — Rotate Headlight Switch switch from low beams to high beams. Pulling back GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE trols the turn signals, headlight high/low beams, and 2 — Ambient Dimmer Control to the neutral position returns the headlights to the flash-to-pass functions. 3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer low beam operation. 4 — Fog Lamps Button

46 Automatic High Beam — If Equipped 3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to Flash-To-Pass switch the headlights to the high beam position. The Automatic High Beam system provides in- Youcan signal another vehicle with your headlights Refer to “Multifunction Lever” in this section for creased forward lighting at night by automating by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. further information. high beam control through the use of a digital cam- This will cause the headlights to turn on at high era mounted on the windshield. This camera de- NOTE: beam and remain on until the lever is released. tects vehicle specific light and automatically This system will not activate until the vehicle is at, or Automatic Headlights switches from high beams to low beams until the above 16 mph (25 km/h). approaching vehicle is out of view. This system automatically turns your headlights on ToDeactivate or off based on ambient light levels. To turn the NOTE: Perform either of the following steps to deactivate system on, turn the headlight switch to the extreme Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and tail- the Automatic High Beam system. clockwise position aligning the indicator with the lights of vehicles in the field of view will cause head- AUTO on the headlight switch. When the system is lights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). 1. Select “Automatic High Beams — OFF” through on, the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on. Also, dirt, film and other obstructions on the wind- the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Set- This means your headlights will stay on for up to shield or camera lens will cause the system to func- tings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual at 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF. tion improperly. www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html To turn the Automatic System off, turn the head- (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Ca- light switch counterclockwise to the O (off) posi- ToActivate nadian Residents) for further information. tion. 2. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch 1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through NOTE: the headlights from the high beam to the low the Uconnect system. Refer to "Uconnect Set- The vehicle must be running before the headlights beam position. tings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual at will come on in the Automatic mode. www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html 3. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Ca- from the AUTO to the on position. nadian Residents) for further information. NOTE: 2. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the Once active, the Automatic High Beam system will AUTO position. stop functioning below 12 mph (20 km/h). 47 Headlights On With Wipers — Toactivate the delay feature, turn the ignition OFF Lights-On Reminder If Equipped while the headlights are still on. The 90 second delay interval begins when headlight switch is If the headlights or the parking lights are left on When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and turned off. If the headlights or parking lights are after the ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will the vehicle is running, the headlights will automati- turned back on or the ignition switch is turned ON, sound when the driver's door is opened. cally turn on when the wiper system is also turned the delay will be cancelled. on. Headlights on when windshield wipers are on Front Fog Lights — If Equipped When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to may be found on vehicles equipped with an auto- Toactivate the front fog lights, turn on the parking have the headlights remain on for 30, 60, or 90 sec- matic headlight system. lights or the low beam headlights and push in the onds or not remain on. Tochange the timer setting, headlight switch control knob. Pushing the head- NOTE: select the proper setting through the Uconnect The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned System. light switch control knob in a second time will turn on or off through the Uconnect system. Refer to the front fog lights off. “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Own- Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in er’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ your Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/ owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for further information. further information. Headlight Delay — If Equipped If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they will turn off in the normal manner. This feature provides the safety of headlight illumi- nation for up to 90 seconds after exiting your ve- NOTE: hicle. The headlights must be turned off within 45 sec-

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE onds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.

Fog Light Switch

48 Turn Signals Lane Change Assist — If Equipped INTERIOR LIGHTS Move the multifunction lever up or down and the Tap the lever up or down once, without moving The courtesy lights turn on when a front door, slid- arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) ing side door, or the liftgate is opened. If your to show proper operation of the front and rear turn will flash three times then automatically turn off. vehicle is equipped with remote keyless entry, the signal lights. Battery Protection lights will also turn on when the unlock button on the NOTE: key fob is pushed. The interior lights can also be This feature provides battery protection to avoid If either light remains on and does not flash, or there turned on by rotating the instrument panel dimmer wearing down the battery if the headlights or park- is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside to the top detent. At the bottom most detent, the ing lights are left on for extended periods of time light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever interior lights will turn off and the instrument cluster, when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is radio, and instrument lighting will go to their lowest After eight minutes of the ignition switch being in defective. dimmable setting. the LOCK position and the headlight switch in any TurnSignal Warning position other than OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off automatically until the next cycle of the If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has ignition switch or headlight switch. traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime will sound The battery protection feature will be disabled if the and a message will display in the cluster to alert the ignition switch is turned to any other position other driver. than LOCK during the eight minute delay.

49 WINDSHIELD WIPER NOTE: one cycle every second to a maximum of approxi- Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents mately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay inter- AND WASHERS the windshield wiper blades from returning to the vals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is Front Wiper Operation off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned 10 mph (16 km/h) or less. off and the blades cannot return to the off position, Windshield Washers The wipers and washers are operated by a switch damage to the wiper motor may occur. within the wiper lever. Rotate the end of the lever To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward upward, to the first detent past the intermittent WARNING! you and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is settings for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the pulled while on the intermittent setting, the wipers end of the lever upward to the second detent past Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after could lead to a collision. Youmight not see other the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper op- the lever is released, and then resume the intermit- vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden ic- eration. tent interval previously selected. If the lever is pulled ing of the windshield during freezing weather, while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use. will operate several wipe cycles, then turn off. Mist Feature Intermittent Wiper System Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause lever upward to the MIST position and release for a between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the single wiping cycle. wiper lever to the first detent position, and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay NOTE: GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE interval. There are four delay settings, which allow The mist feature does not activate the washer you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid. Washer And Wiper Controls 50 Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped • The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off • Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles through the Uconnect System. Refer to equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain This feature senses rain or snowfall on the wind- “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Own- Sensing wipers are not operational when the ve- shield and automatically activates the wipers for the er’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ hicle is in the remote start mode. Once the opera- driver. This feature is especially useful for road owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or tor is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition splash or overspray from the windshield washers of www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for switch in the RUN position, rain sensing wiper the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the multifunc- further information. operation can resume, if it has been selected, and tion lever to one of the four intermittent wiper no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) sensitivity settings to activate this feature. The Rain Sensing system has protective features for exist. the wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the the following conditions: Rear Wiper And Washer multifunction lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If • Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Rear Windshield Wiper Operation the operator desires more wiping sensitivity, they Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring up- may select sensitivity position 4. If the operator is first switched ON, when the vehicle is stationary wards to operate one of two modes for the rear desires less wiping sensitivity, they may select sensi- and the outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), window wiper: unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever tivity positions 2 or 1. Place the multifunction lever in • First detent — intermittent mode. the OFF position when not using the system. is moved, the vehicle speed becomes greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the outside temperature rises • Second detent — continuous mode. NOTE: above freezing. • The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when • Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature the wiper speed is in the low or high position. will not operate when the ignition is ON, when the • The Rain Sensing feature may not function prop- transmission gear selector is in the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph erly when ice or dried saltwater is present on the (5 km/h), unless the wiper control on the multi- windshield. function lever is moved, the vehicle speed is • Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or sili- greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the gear selector is cone may reduce rain sensor performance. moved out of the NEUTRAL position. 51 Rear Windshield Washer Operation CLIMATE CONTROLS Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward acti- Overview vates the rear window washer. If the lever is pushed while on the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn The Climate Control System allows you to regulate on and operate for several wipe cycles after the the temperature, air flow, and direction of air circu- lever is released, and then resume the intermittent lating throughout the vehicle. The controls are lo- interval previously selected. If the lever is pushed cated on the instrument panel below the radio. while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate several wipe cycles, then turn off. NOTE: Heating and A/C are only available with the vehicle running, unless the vehicle is plugged in. Automatic Climate Controls On The Faceplate

Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV with 8.4–inch

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE display Automatic Climate Controls

52 Control Descriptions Icon Description MAX A/C Button Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off. A/C Button Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on. Recirculation Button Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. AUTO Button Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Togglingthis function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information. Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting. Rear Defrost Button Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes. Rear Climate Control Button Rear Climate Press and release this button to access the rear climate controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear climate controls are on.

53 Icon Description

Driver and Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings

SYNC Button Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. The SYNC feature also synchronizes the rear passengers’ temperature to the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature. Faceplate Knob Blower Control Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. MODE The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen. • Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. Touchscreen Buttons The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise. • Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

54 Icon Description Modes Control Modes Control Push the button in the center of the knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air MODE comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:

Panel Mode Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets. Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Floor Mode Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

Mix Mode Mix Mode Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Controls off.

55 through the outlets into the cabin. For improved In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position CAUTION! fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing Failure to follow these cautions can cause dam- air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to age to the heating elements: airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select only switch to the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit. • Use care when washing the inside of the rear Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes. Recirculation window. Do not use abrasive window clean- NOTE: ers on the interior surface of the window. Use When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish wiping parallel to the heating elements. La- glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recircula- bels can be peeled off after soaking with speed if needed. tion control button. The Recirculation indicator will warm water. • If your air conditioning performance seems lower illuminate when this button is selected. Press the • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or than expected, check the front of the A/C con- button a second time to turn off the Recirculation abrasive window cleaners on the interior sur- denser (located in front of the radiator), for an mode and allow outside air into the vehicle. face of the window. accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle • Keep all objects a safe distance from the NOTE: water spray from the front of the radiator and window. In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead through the condenser. to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation Climate Control Functions MAX A/C feature may be unavailable (button on the touch- screen greyed out) if conditions exist that could A/C (Air Conditioning) MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling create fogging on the inside of the windshield. performance. The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the op- erator to manually activate or deactivate the air Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE conditioning system. When the air conditioning the prior settings. The button illuminates when system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow MAX A/C is on.

56 Automatic Temperature Control NOTE: Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From (ATC) — If Equipped It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The Front ATC Panel The system automatically adjusts the temperature, The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjust- Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly ment of the rear climate controls from the front Automatic Operation as possible. ATC panel. 1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC Panel Toprovide you with maximum comfort in the auto- Tochange the rear system settings: and the word “AUTO” will illuminate in the front matic mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan • Press the "REAR CLIMATE" button on the ATC display,along with two temperatures for the will remain on low until the engine warms up. The touchscreen to change control to rear control fan will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is driver and front passenger. The system will then mode, Rear display will appear. Control functions selected, or by changing the front blower knob automatically regulate the amount of airflow. now operate rear system. setting. 2. Adjust the temperature you would like the sys- • To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect tem to maintain, by adjusting the driver, passen- Manual Operation Override radio, press the "Front Climate" or “Done” button ger, and rear temperatures. Once the desired on the touchscreen. This system offers a full complement of manual temperature is displayed, the system will achieve override features. The AUTO symbol in the front and automatically maintain that comfort level. ATC display will be turned off when the system is 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, being used in the manual mode. it is not necessary to change the settings. Youwill experience the greatest efficiency by simply al- lowing the system to function automatically.

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display

57 Icon Description Rear Auto Button REAR AUTO Automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information. Rear Lock Button Press and release to lock out the rear manual temperature controls from adjusting the rear temperature and blower settings. Front Climate Button Press and release this button to change the display on the Uconnect radio back to the Front Climate Controls.

Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Push the up arrow button on the touchscreen to increase the temperature. Push the down arrow button on the touchscreen to decrease the temperature. When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s temperature will move up and down with the driver’s temperature.

SYNC Button — If Equipped Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the rear passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. The SYNC feature also synchronizes the front passenger’s temperature to the driver temperature setting. Changing the rear passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature. Blower Control Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using the buttons on the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE touchscreen. Rear Passenger Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off.

58 Icon Description Panel Mode Panel Mode Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Panel Mode. In Panel Mode, air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets. Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Bi-Level Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Floor Mode Floor Mode Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Floor Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

59 Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Once the desired temperature is displayed, the — If Equipped ATC System will automatically achieve and main- tain that comfort level. When the system is set up The rear ATC system has floor air outlets under- for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change neath the passengers’ seats, and overhead outlets at the settings. You will experience the greatest effi- each outboard rear seating position. The system ciency by simply allowing the system to function provides heated air through the floor outlets or automatically. cool, dehumidified air through the headliner out- lets. NOTE: Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear • It is not necessary to move the temperature set- Rear Automatic Climate Controls ATC control when the Rear Temperature Lock but- tings. The system automatically adjusts the tem- ton is turned off. 1. Adjust the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and perature, mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible. The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, on the Rear Modes to suit your comfort needs. the passenger side of the vehicle. 2. ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button. Icon Description

Rear Mode Control Push this button on the Rear Climate Hard Controls to change the air distribution mode for the rear passengers to one of the following:

Panel Mode Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.

60 Icon Description Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets. NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Floor Mode Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets.

Rear Temperature Control • Rear Passenger Temperature Up Button Tochange the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push temperature control up button to raise the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in control head. • Rear Passenger Temperature Down Button Tochange the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push temperature control down button to lower the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in control head.

Rear Blower Control The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any fixed blower speed by pushing the blower control buttons. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. The larger of the two icons increases blower speed, whereas the smaller of the two icons decreases the blower speed.

AUTO Button — If Equipped Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.

61 Icon Description

Rear Climate Control/Blower Off Tomanually set the rear blower controls to off, press the Rear Climate Control/Blower Off button.

Operating Tips Vacation/Storage Outside Air Intake Summer Operation Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as The engine cooling system must be protected with the air conditioning system at idle for about five leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting on high. airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could corrosion protection and to protect against engine This will ensure adequate system lubrication to plug the water drains. In winter months, make sure overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow. MS.90032) with deionized, or distilled water for minimize the possibility of compressor damage proper corrosion protection is recommended. when the system is started again. Cabin Air Filter Winter Operation Window Fogging The climate control system filters out dust and pol- len from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, To ensure the best possible heater and defroster service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, performance, make sure the engine cooling system when needed. is functioning properly and the proper amount, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front type, and concentration of coolant is used. Use of blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode the Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is without A/C for long periods, as fogging may oc- GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE not recommended, because it may cause window cur. fogging.

62 TRI-PANE The Tri-Pane Panoramic Sunroof switch is located to the left between the sun visors on the overhead WARNING! PANORAMIC SUNROOF console. • Do not allow small children to operate the — IF EQUIPPED sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body The Power Shade switch is located to the right parts, or any object, to project through the between the sun visors on the overhead console. sunroof opening. Injury may result.

WARNING! Opening Sunroof

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, Express Mode or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never Push the switch rearward and release it within one leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a second. The sunroof will open automatically from location accessible to children. Do not leave any position and stop at the full open position. This the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless is called “Express Open.” During Express Open Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switch Occupants, particularly unattended children, will stop the sunroof. can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. NOTE: Such entrapment may result in serious injury If the sunshade is in the closed position when the or death. open switch is pushed, the sunshade will automati- Tri-Pane Panoramic Sunroof And • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being cally cycle to the halfway open position prior to the Power Shade Switches thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. sunroof opening. You could also be seriously injured or killed. 1 — Sunroof Switch 2 — Power Shade Switch Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly se- cured.

63 Manual Mode Manual Mode shade switch rearward again and release it within one second and the shade will open automatically To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch Toclose the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the to the full-open position. This is called “Express rearward to full open. Any release of the switch will forward position. Any release of the switch will stop Open”. During Express Open operation, any other stop the movement. The sunroof will remain in a the movement and the sunroof will remain in a actuation of the shade switch will stop the shade. partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is partially closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again. pushed again. Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode Venting Sunroof — Express Wind Buffeting To open the shade, push and hold the switch rear- Push and release the "Vent" button within one sec- ward. The shade will open and stop automatically at Wind buffeting can be described as the perception the half-open position. Push and hold the shade ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in This is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur re- switch rearward again and the shade will open auto- the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting gardless of sunroof position. matically to the full-open position. Any release of with the windows down, or the sunroof (if the switch will stop the movement and the shade will NOTE: equipped) in certain open or partially open posi- remain in a partially opened condition until the If the sunshade is in the closed position when the tions. This is a normal occurrence and can be mini- switch is pushed again. vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automati- mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows cally cycle to the halfway open position prior to the open, open the front and rear windows together to Closing Power Shade — Express Mode sunroof opening to the Vent position. minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with Push the switch forward and release it within one the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to second and the shade will close automatically from Closing Sunroof minimize the buffeting or open any window. any position. If the sunroof is completely closed the Express Mode Power Sun Shade — If Equipped shade will close fully and stop automatically. This is Push the switch forward and release it within one called “Express Close”. During Express Close op- GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Opening Power Shade — Express Mode second and the sunroof will close automatically eration, any other actuation of the switch will stop from any position. The sunroof will close fully and Push the shade switch rearward and release it within the shade. stop automatically. This is called “Express Close.” one second and the shade will open automatically During Express Close operation, any other actua- from any position. The shade will open and stop tion of the switch will stop the sunroof. automatically at the half-open position. Push the 64 NOTE: Sunroof Maintenance HOOD If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to half-open position. Pushing the shade close button Opening clean the glass panel. again will automatically close both the sunroof and shade completely. Ignition Off Operation WARNING! Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode The power sunroof switch will remain active for up Always cycle the ignition to OFF mode before Toclose the shade, push and hold the switch in the to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition opening the hood. If the ignition is in ON mode forward position. Any release of the switch will stop switch is turned to the OFF/LOCK position. Open- and the Propulsion System is active when the the movement and the shade will remain in a par- ing either front door will cancel this feature. hood is opened, the engine will automatically start, and persons not clear of the vehicle could tially closed condition until the switch is pushed NOTE: be seriously injured by the engine’s moving parts. again. Ignition Off time is programmable through the Pinch Protect Feature Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in The hood release lever (to open the primary latch) “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual at and safety latch (to open the secondary latch) must This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html be released to open the hood. of the sunroof during the Express Close operation. (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Cana- If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is de- dian Residents) for further information. tected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Re- move the obstruction if this occurs. NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.

65 1. Pull the hood release lever located under the 3. Push the safety latch release lever toward the pas- Closing driver’s side of the instrument panel. senger side of the vehicle. The safety latch is 1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the located behind the center front edge of the hood. other hand remove the support rod from its seat and reinsert it into the locking tab. 2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) from the engine compartment and drop it. Make sure that the hood is completely closed.

WARNING! Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.

Hood Release Lever Safety Latch Location CAUTION! 2. Move to the outside of the front of the vehicle. 4. Remove the support rod from the locking tab and insert it into the seat located on the under- To prevent possible damage, do not slam the side of the hood. hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately NOTE: 12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE • Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed, are not in motion and not in the lifted position. with both latches engaged. • While lifting the hood, use both hands. • Vehiclemust be at a stop and the automatic trans- mission must be in park. 66 LIFTGATE If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, de- pressing the touch pad on the outside handle or Power Liftgate — If Equipped Hands-Free Liftgate foot activation (if equipped) will unlock and open the liftgate, with a valid Passive The power liftgate may be opened or closed in Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate several ways: handle. • Overhead console liftgate button NOTE: • Key fob • Toopen the liftgate, the Hands-Free Liftgate foot • Outside handle (opens liftgate only) activation (if equipped) requires a valid Passive • Button just inside the liftgate on the upper left trim Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle. (when liftgate is open) • If 1st Press of key fob Unlocks “All Doors” is pro- • Hands-Free Liftgate (opens liftgate only) — grammed in Uconnect Settings, all doors will un- If Equipped lock with a Passive Entry hands-free activation. If Overhead Console Power Switches 1st Press of key fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is pro- Using the above ways: grammed in Uconnect Settings, the liftgate will 1 — Liftgate • When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will only unlock with hands-free activation. 2 — Right Sliding Door open 3 — Sliding Door Power Off • Tonesare sounded and the turn signals are flashed • When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will 4 — Left Sliding Door with liftgate movements. These alerts can be close turned on or off in Uconnect Settings. • When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will • Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in reverse The key fob and the overhead console button will the Owner’s Manual at https://www.mopar.com/ operate the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) Push the Power Liftgate button on the Overhead outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked. or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) Console to open or close the liftgate. for further information. Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five seconds to open or close the liftgate. 67 ToClose The Liftgate Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped When a valid kicking motion is completed, the lift- gate will chime, the hazard lights will flash and the The liftgate can also be closed using the Rear Inte- liftgate will open after approximately one second. rior Power Liftgate button (if equipped), located in This assumes all options are enabled in the radio. the upper left trim in the liftgate opening. Lock The Vehicle NOTE: To open the Hands-Free Liftgate requires a valid With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door of the liftgate, pushing the passive entry lock button handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is not within located to the right of the outside handle will lock 5 ft (1.5 m), the liftgate will not respond to any kicks. the vehicle. CAUTION! The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned on or off in Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual at https://www.mopar.com/ Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) Toopen the liftgate using hands-free activation, use or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) a straight in and out kicking motion under the ve- for further information. The Hands-Free Lift- hicle activation zone in the general location below gate feature should be turned off during Jack- the liftgate door handle. Do not move your foot ing, Tire Changing, and Vehicle Service. sideways or in a sweeping motion or the sensors GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE may not detect the motion.

68 NOTE: WARNING! WARNING! • The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when the transmission is in Park. • Driving with the liftgate open can allow poi- During power operation, personal injury or cargo sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel • If anything obstructs the Hands-Free liftgate while and your passengers could be injured by these path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and it is opening, the liftgate will automatically reverse fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are latched before driving away. to the closed position, provided it meets sufficient operating the vehicle. resistance. • If you are required to drive with the liftgate INTERNAL EQUIPMENT • There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the open, make sure that all windows are closed, liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along and the climate control blower switch is set at Power Outlets these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the high speed. Do not use the recirculation Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp) open position. mode. power outlets, and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB power • If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstruc- Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. outlets, that can be used to power cellular phones, tions within the same cycle, the system will auto- However, because the gas pressure drops with tem- small electronics and other low powered electrical matically stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be perature, it may be necessary to assist the props accessories. The power outlets can be labeled with operated manually. when opening the liftgate in cold weather. either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how • The power liftgate will release, but not power the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with a NOTE: open, in temperatures below −12° F (−24° C). Be “key” are powered when the ignition is in the ON or Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manu- sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a “bat- ally pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the liftgate before opening the liftgate. tery” are connected directly to the battery and pow- liftgate obstacle detection feature and stop the ered at all times. • If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of power operation or reverse its direction. time, the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset power liftgate functionality.

69 NOTE: The front power outlet is located at the bottom of In addition to the front power outlets, there is also a • All accessories connected to the “battery” pow- the instrument panel. power outlet located in the rear cargo area. ered outlets should be removed or turned off The rear power outlet is located in the right rear when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery cargo area. against discharge. • Toensure proper cigar lighter operation, a Mopar knob and element must be used.

CAUTION! Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow 12 Volt Front Power Outlet the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Rear Power Outlet

NOTE: The USB outlet in the bottom of the instrument GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE panel can be switched from “ignition” only to con- stant “battery” powered all the time. See your local Front USB Charge Only Port authorized dealer for details.

70 Power Inverter — If Equipped WARNING! CAUTION! There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt Power Inverter outlet Toavoid serious injury or death: • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw located on the right side of the vehicle, before the • Only devices designed for use in this type of power from the vehicle's battery, even when third row of seats to convert DC current to AC outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt out- not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu- current. The Power Inverter can power cellular let. ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's phones, electronics and other low power devices • Do not touch with wet hands. battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade requiring up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video • Close the lid when not in use and while driving battery life and/or prevent the vehicle from game consoles will exceed this power limit, as will the vehicle. starting. most power tools. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., cool- electric shock and failure. ers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution. • After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's battery or plug the vehicle in with EVSE charger.

Power Inverter

The Power Inverter will automatically turn on and off when the device is plugged in or removed. 71 The Power Inverter is designed with built-in over- load protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is WARNING! exceeded, the Power Inverter will automatically shut Toavoid serious injury or death: down. Once the electrical device has been removed • Do not insert any objects into the from the Power Inverter it will automatically reset. receptacles. To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power • Do not touch with wet hands. ratings on electrical devices prior to using the Power • Close the lid when not in use. Inverter. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . .74 WARNING LIGHTS AND White Indicator Lights ...... 85 Instrument Cluster Display Location And MESSAGES...... 77 Blue Indicator Lights ...... 85 Controls...... 74 Red Warning Lights...... 77 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC Oil Life Reset ...... 75 Yellow Warning Lights ...... 80 SYSTEM—OBDII...... 85 KeySense Cluster Messages — If Equipped . . .75 Yellow Indicator Lights ...... 83 Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Instrument Cluster Display Programmable Green Indicator Lights ...... 84 Cybersecurity...... 86 Features Screen Setup ...... 76

73 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER Instrument Cluster Display Location The system allows the driver to select information And Controls by pushing the following buttons mounted on the DISPLAY steering wheel: The Instrument Cluster Display is located in the Yourvehicle is equipped with an Instrument Cluster center of the instrument cluster. Display, which offers useful information to the driver. With the ignition in the STOP/OFF position The Main Menu items consists of the following: (and the key removed, for vehicles with mechanical • Speedometer key), opening/closing of a door will activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles or • Vehicle Info kilometers in the odometer. Your Instrument Clus- • Driver Assist ter Display is designed to display important infor- • Hybrid Info mation about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver interactive display located on the • Trip (Trip A/Trip B) instrument panel, your Instrument Cluster Display • Audio can show you how systems are working and give you • Messages warnings when they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through and • Screen Setup enter the main menus and sub-menus. You can • Speed Warning — If Equipped Instrument Cluster Display access the specific information you want and make Control Buttons selections and adjustments. • Up Arrow Button Push and release the up arrow button to scroll upward through the Main Menu items. • Down Arrow Button Push and release the down arrow button to scroll downward through the Main Menu items. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

74 • Right Arrow Button • Unless reset, this message will continue to display 1. Push the OK button to enter the instrument Push and release the right arrow button to access each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN cluster display menu screen. position. To reset the oil change indicator system the information screens or submenu screens of a 2. Push and release the down arrow button to ac- main menu item. (after performing the scheduled maintenance) re- fer to the following procedure. cess the ”Oil Life” menu screen. • Back/Left Arrow Button 3. Push the left arrow button or right arrow button Push and release the left arrow button to access • Toreset the oil change indicator after performing the scheduled maintenance, refer to the following to access the “Vehicle Info” submenu. the information screens or submenu screens of a procedure. main menu item. 4. Hold the OK button to reset the “Oil Life” to 100%. • OK Button Push the OK button to access/select the informa- 5. Push the up arrow button to exit the instrument tion screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu cluster display menu screen. item. Push and hold the OK arrow button for one NOTE: second to reset displayed/selected features that If the indicator message illuminates when you start can be reset. the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not Oil Life Reset reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. • Yourvehicle is equipped with an engine oil change KeySense Cluster Messages — indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message If Equipped will display for approximately five seconds after a When the KeySense key is in use there will be: single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which Keyless Push Button Ignition • Continuous, dedicated telltale means the engine oil change interval may fluctu- Without pressing the brake pedal, push the EN- • Unique Display Splash Screen ate, dependent upon your personal driving style. GINE START/STOP button and place the ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start the vehicle.)

75 With KeySense in use there will be multiple associated messages shown in the following table: Setting Instrument Cluster Display Message None – With vehicle ignition ON “KeySense in use. Max vehicle speed set to xx MPH/or km/h” • “Max speed reached. KeySense in use” supported by a chime Max Vehicle Speed • “Approaching max speed xx MPH/km” supported by a chime Start Up Fuel Alert message “Range to empty xxx miles or km” Early Low Fuel Alert Message “Fuel Low” ParkSense “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use” Blind Spot “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use” Forward Collision Warning “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”

Instrument Cluster Display Programmable Features Screen Setup Push the up or down arrow button to scroll through the Menu Items until the Screen Setup displays in the instrument cluster display. Push the OK button to enter Screen Setup. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster display as well as the loca- tion that information is displayed. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

76 Configurable Screen Setup Menu Titles • Compass • Trip A Distance • Outside Temp • Trip B Distance • Time • Audio Info • Range to Empty • Menu Title • Average MPG • Speedometer (Digital Speed) select between MPH/km • Current MPG • Defaults (Restore/Cancel) • Odometer

Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To while driving, have the system inspected at an au- — Brake Warning Light Know Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s thorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will This light monitors various brake functions, includ- Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the ing brake fluid level and parking brake application. If owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay the brake light turns on it may indicate that the www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is further information. intermittently or remains on while driving, have an low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. WARNING LIGHTS AND brake system reservoir. — Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light MESSAGES If the light remains on when the parking brake has When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark Red Warning Lights ACC/ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem — Air Bag Warning Light on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger with the Brake Booster has been detected by the This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Re- Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/ minder Light will flash or remain on continuously Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will re- RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. If the light is and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Re- main on until the condition has been corrected. If the either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on straints Systems” in “Safety” for further information. 77 problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS Vehiclesequipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System — Battery Charge Warning Light pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake This light illuminates when the battery is not charg- pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along ing properly. If it stays on while the engine is run- The dual brake system provides a reserve braking with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS ning, there may be a malfunction with the charging capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the system is required. system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual possible. brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be This indicates a possible problem with the electrical which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the checked by turning the ignition switch from the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level. OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light system or a related component. should illuminate for approximately two seconds. — Engine Temperature Warning Light The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. The light should then turn off unless the parking NOTE: brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the This light warns of an overheated engine condition. The light may flash momentarily during sharp cor- light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this nering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi- your authorized dealer. indicator will illuminate and a single chime will tions. The vehicle should have service performed, The light also will turn on when the parking brake is sound. If the temperature reaches the upper limit, a and the brake fluid level checked. applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN continuous chime will be sound for four minutes or until the engine is allowed to cool whichever comes If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is position. first. necessary. NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is ap- If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over WARNING! plied. It does not show the degree of brake applica- and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it tion. off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not dangerous. Part of the brake system may have return to normal, turn the engine off immediately failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You and call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Over- could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked heats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further infor- immediately. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL mation. 78 — Electric Power Steering Fail Warning off. If the light remains on with the vehicle running, Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is cor- Light your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an rected. This light does not indicate how much oil is authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked This light will turn on when there's a fault with the under the hood. EPS (Electric Power Steering). Refer to “Power If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is Steering” in “Starting And Operating” in the Own- running, immediate service is required and you may — Transmission Temperature Warning er’s Manual at https://www.mopar.com/en-us/ experience reduced performance, an elevated/ Light — If Equipped care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may This light indicates that there is excessive transmis- www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for require towing. The light will come on when the sion fluid temperature that might occur with severe further information. ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly WARNING! If the light does not come on during starting, have faster, with the transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, the system checked by an authorized dealer. until the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you Continued operation with reduced assist could may continue to drive normally. pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service — Oil Temperature Warning Light should be obtained as soon as possible. This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. WARNING! If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. If you continue operating the vehicle when the — Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illu- Warning Light — Oil Pressure Warning Light minated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust com- This light informs you of a problem with the Elec- This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the ponents and cause a fire. tronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut is detected while the vehicle is running, the light will off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of sound when this light turns on. the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn 79 — Liftgate Open Warning Light • “Issue Detected Check External Charging Sta- CAUTION! tion” – If you see this message, something may be This indicator will turn when the liftgate is open. Continuous driving with the Transmission Tem- wrong with the charger/charging station and not perature Warning Light illuminated will eventu- NOTE: your vehicle. It is recommended to try a different ally cause severe transmission damage or trans- If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single charging station to verify. If an issue continues, then contact you authorized dealer. mission failure. chime. NOTE: — Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Before driving the vehicle make sure the charging — Vehicle Security Warning Light — Service Light cord has been removed from the charging inlet. If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when service to the — Torque Limited Warning Light This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately hybrid electric system is needed. It will be accom- 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arm- panied by a "Service Hybrid Electric Vehicle Sys- This telltale illuminates when vehicle acceleration is ing, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is tem" message in the cluster. If the telltale stays on or limited due to a reduction in engine or electric disarmed. continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer motor performance. Contact your authorized as soon as possible. dealer for service. — Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped — Plug Status Fault Warning Light Yellow Warning Lights This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/ This indicator will illuminate when a plug status fault — Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning open and not fully closed. is detected (when vehicle not in motion). It will be Light If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single accompanied by a cluster message indicating the This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System chime. type of fault. You may receive one of the following (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is messages if a fault is detected: placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN posi- • “Service Charging System” – If you see this mes- tion and may stay on for as long as four seconds. sage, contact your authorized dealer to service your high voltage charging system. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

80 If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indi- — LaneSense Warning Light — then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is cator Light” come on momentarily each time the If Equipped not functioning and service is required. However, ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid yellow the conventional brake system will continue to op- RUN position. when the vehicle is approaching a lane marker. The erate normally if the brake warning light is not on. • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking warning light will flash when the vehicle is crossing If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds the lane marker. serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits will stop when ESC becomes inactive. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Starting of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn • This light will come on when the vehicle is in an And Operating” for further information. on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ESC event. ACC/ON/RUN position, have the light inspected — LaneSense Failure Warning Light — — Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off by an authorized dealer. If Equipped Warning Light — If Equipped — Electronic Stability Control (ESC) This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control Warning Light — If Equipped not operating and needs service. Please see your (ESC) is off. authorized dealer. The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or will come on when the ignition is placed in the — Low Fuel Warning Light ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when it was turned off previously. When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.26 gal ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine (4.75 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on — Electronic Park Brake Fail Light fuel is added. continuously with the engine running, a malfunction This telltale will turn on to indicate the Electronic has been detected in the ESC system. If this light A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel Park Brake is not functioning properly and service is remains on after several ignition cycles, and the Warning. required. Contact your authorized dealer. vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. 81 — Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — transmission control systems. The light will illumi- CAUTION! If Equipped nate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on This indicator will illuminate when the windshield Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica- when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have tor Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the washer fluid is low. the condition checked promptly. vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas severe catalytic converter damage and power Fault Warning Light — If Equipped cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light loss will soon occur. Immediate service is re- This telltale will turn on to indicate a fault in the after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if quired. ACC system. Contact your local authorized dealer the light stays on through several typical driving for service. For further information, refer to “Adap- styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive nor- tive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Op- mally. — Tire Pressure Monitoring System erating.” When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to (TPMS) Warning Light alert serious conditions that could lead to immedi- — Forward Collision Warning Light — The warning light switches on and a message is ate loss of power or severe catalytic converter dam- If Equipped displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower age. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as than the recommended value and/or that slow pres- This telltale will turn on to indicate a fault in the possible if this occurs. sure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire Forward Collision Warning System. Contact your duration and fuel consumption may not be guaran- local authorized dealer for service. Refer to "For- WARNING! teed. ward Collision Warning (FCW)" in "Safety" for A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as refer- Should one or more tires be in the condition men- further information. enced above, can reach higher temperatures tioned above, the display will show the indications — Engine Check/Malfunction than in normal operating conditions. This can corresponding to each tire in sequence. Indicator Warning Light (MIL) cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flam- mable substances such as dry plants, wood, card- The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light board, etc. This could result in death or serious (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System injury to the driver, occupants or others. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic 82 to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi- replacing one or more tires or wheels on your ve- CAUTION! ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi- hicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate Do not continue driving with one or more flat cle’s handling and stopping ability. tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s re- tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using sponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if CAUTION! the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger authorized dealer as soon as possible. The TPMS has been optimized for the original illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable sys- be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is tem operation or sensor damage may result inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction in- when using replacement equipment that is not of manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation dicator is combined with the low tire pressure tell- pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket tale. When the system detects a malfunction, the wheels can cause sensor damage. Using after- size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or telltale will flash for approximately one minute and market tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure tire inflation pressure label, you should determine then remain continuously illuminated. This se- Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) quence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start- inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire seal- As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the ant it is recommended that you take your vehicle equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may to your authorized dealer to have your sensor (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as function checked. when one or more of your tires is significantly under- intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a va- Yellow Indicator Lights inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure riety of reasons, including the installation of replace- telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that Forward Collision Warning Off tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Al- Indicator Light — If Equipped proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under- ways check the TPMS malfunction telltale after This light indicates that Forward Collision Warning inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead is off. 83 Green Indicator Lights — LaneSense Indicator Light — — Park/Headlight On Indicator Light If Equipped — TurnSignal Indicator Lights This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both headlights are turned on. The turn signal arrows will flash independently when lane markings have been detected and the system is left or right turn signals are selected. Turn signals — Front Fog Indicator Light — “armed” to provide visual warnings in the instrument can be activated when the multifunction lever is If Equipped cluster and a torque warning in the steering wheel if moved down (left) or up (right). an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to This indicator will illuminate when the front fog NOTE: “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Starting And Oper- lights are on. ating” for further information. • A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is — Cruise Control SET Indicator Light driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set This light will turn on when the speed control is set signal on. With No Target Detected Light — to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed Control” in If Equipped • Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if ei- “Starting And Operating” for further information. ther indicator flashes at a rapid rate. This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise — Plug Status Indicator Light — KeySense Indicator Light — Control speed is SET and there is no target vehicle If Equipped detected. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control When plugged in, the green plug will appear if the (ACC) — If Equipped" in "Starting And Operat- EVSE charging plug is securely attached to the The KeySense indicator is solid green when a Key- ing" for further information. charging part. This indicates that the plug is de- Sense key is detected upon startup of the vehicle. tected, but doesn't mean it is charging. It will be — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set The indicator will remain lit for the entire key cycle accompanied with a cluster message indicating the as a reminder that the KeySense key is in use. While With Target Detected Light — If Equipped charge status: the KeySense key is in use, the vehicle will respond This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise • “Plugged In And Charging” to settings associated with the KeySense profile. Control speed is SET and the target vehicle is de- Refer to “Keys" in “Getting to Know Your Vehicle” tected. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) • “Plugged In And Waiting to Charge On A Set for further information. — If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for Schedule” GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL further information. • “Plugged in and Charging Complete” 84 NOTE: — Set Speed Warning Light — function lever rearward (toward the rear of the ve- The vehicle cannot be driven until it is unplugged. If Equipped hicle) to turn off the high beams. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to When Set Speed Warning is turned on, the speed White Indicator Lights pass" scenario. warning telltale will illuminate in the instrument clus- — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready ter with a number matching the set speed. When Light — If Equipped the set speed is exceeded, a single chime will sound This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped along with pop up message of speed warning ex- ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has been ceeded. When the set speed is exceeded by SYSTEM — OBD II turned on and in the READY state. Refer to “Adap- 1.8 mph (3 km/h) or more, the indication will light up tive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Start- yellow and flash along with a continuous chime (up Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated On- ing And Operating” for further information. to ten seconds or until the speed is no longer ex- board Diagnostic system called OBD II. This sys- ceeded). Speed Warning can be turned on and off tem monitors the performance of the emissions, — LaneSense Indicator Light — in the instrument cluster display,for further informa- engine, and automatic transmission control sys- If Equipped tion refer to “Instrument Cluster Display Menu tems. When these systems are operating properly, When the LaneSense system is ON, but not armed, Items” in “Getting ToKnow YourInstrument Panel.” your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as emissions well within cur- the LaneSense indicator is solid white. This occurs The number “55” is only an example of a speed that rent government regulations. when only left, right, or neither line has been de- can be set. tected. If a single lane line is detected, the system is If any of these systems require service, the OBD II ready to provide only visual warnings if an uninten- Blue Indicator Lights system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light tional lane departure occurs on detected lane line. — High Beam Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Starting information to assist your service technician in mak- And Operating” for further information. This indicator shows that the high beam headlights ing repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be are on. With the low beams activated, push the — Speed Control ON Indicator Light drivable and not need towing, see an authorized multifunction lever forward (toward the front of the dealer for service as soon as possible. This light will turn on when the electronic speed vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multi- control is ON, but a speed has not been set. 85 Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) CAUTION! WARNING! Cybersecurity • If unauthorized equipment is connected to the • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diag- OBD II connection port, such as a driver- cause further damage to the emission control nostic system (OBD II) and a connection port to behavior tracking device, it may: system. It could also affect fuel economy and allow access to information related to the perfor- • Be possible that vehicle systems, includ- driveability. The vehicle must be serviced be- mance of your emissions controls. Authorized ser- ing safety related systems, could be im- fore any emissions tests can be performed. vice technicians may need to access this informa- • If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is run- paired or a loss of vehicle control could ning, severe catalytic converter damage and tion to assist with the diagnosis and service of your occur that may result in an accident in- power loss will soon occur. Immediate service vehicle and emissions system. volving serious injury or death. • Access, or allow others to access, infor- is required. WARNING! mation stored in your vehicle systems, including personal information. • ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II con- For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in nection port in order to diagnose or service “Multimedia”. your vehicle. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

86 SAFETY

SAFETY SAFETY FEATURES ...... 88 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .96 SAFETY TIPS ...... 137 Regenerative Braking System (RBS) — Occupant Restraint Systems Features ...... 96 Transporting Passengers ...... 137 Hybrid ...... 88 Important Safety Precautions ...... 96 Exhaust Gas ...... 137 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS....88 Seat Belt Systems ...... 97 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside Blind Spot Monitoring ...... 88 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) .....106 The Vehicle ...... 138 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) ...... 91 Child Restraints ...... 119 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .....92 Transporting Pets ...... 137 Outside The Vehicle ...... 140

87 SAFETY FEATURES AUXILIARY DRIVING Regenerative Braking System (RBS) SYSTEMS — Hybrid Blind Spot Monitoring SAFETY Your vehicle has a Regenerative Braking System The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two (RBS). The RBS reduces the high voltage battery radar-based sensors located inside the rear bumper consumption of the vehicle, particularly in stop- fascia to detect highway licensable vehicles (auto- and-go city traffic. The electric motors which pro- mobiles, trucks, motorcycles etc.) that enter the pel the vehicle forward can operate as generators blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the when braking. The RBS recharges the high voltage vehicle. battery under certain braking conditions by recap- Rear Detection Zones turing energy that would otherwise be lost while The BSM detection zone covers approximately one When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light braking. The electric power that is generated goes lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view back into the high voltage battery for later use, for The zone length starts at the outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is example when acceleration is desired. mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) be- yond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or RE- The RBS uses conventional hydraulic friction system monitors the detection zones on both sides VERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle brakes, regenerative braking, or a combination to of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches ap- is in PARK. slow the vehicle. If the system detects slippery con- proximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher, and will ditions while braking, ONLY friction is used to slow alert the driver of vehicles in these areas. the vehicle. The RBS can result in extended life of the hydraulic service brakes; however, all inspection, scheduled maintenance, and service intervals for the vehicle service brakes must be followed.

88 The BSM warning light, located in the outside mir- Rear Cross Path (RCP) When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the rors, will illuminate if a vehicle moves into a blind driver is alerted using both the visual and audible The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to spot zone. alarms, including reducing the radio volume. aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be WARNING! blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear up aid system. It is intended to be used to help a view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking detected, alert the driver. lot situation. Drivers must be careful when back- ing up, even when using RCP. Always check RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots be- speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects fore backing up. Failure to do so can result in moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph serious injury or death. (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations. Modes Of Operation Blind Spot Warning Light NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be Three selectable modes of operation are available The BSM system can also be configured to sound obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the in the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Set- an audible (chime) alert and mute the radio to sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, tings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual at notify you of objects that have entered the detec- the system will not be able to alert the driver. Addi- www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html tion zones. (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Cana- tionally, if the host vehicle is obscured by a flat dian Residents) for further information. object on one side the system can false alert on vehicles approaching from the opposite direction.

89 Blind Spot Alert Lights Only — Default Setting When the system is in RCP, the system shall re- General Information spond with both visual and audible alerts when a When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM The following regulatory statement applies to all detected object is present. Whenever an audible system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/ vehicle: side view mirror based on a detected object. How- hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always SAFETY ever, when the system is operating in Rear Cross requests the chime. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond with and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS stan- Blind Spot Alert Off both visual and audible alerts when a detected ob- dard(s). Operation is subject to the following two ject is present. Whenever an audible alert is re- When the BSM system is turned off there will be no conditions: quested, the radio is muted. visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. systems. Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime 2. This device must accept any interference re- When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime NOTE: ceived, including interference that may cause mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in • The BSM system will store the current operating undesired operation. mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the the appropriate side view mirror based on a de- NOTE: vehicle is started the previously stored mode will tected object. If the turn signal is then activated, Changes or modifications not expressly approved be recalled and used. and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of by the party responsible for compliance could void the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded. • The BSM system can work in conjunction with the the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are Keysense function of the vehicle if equipped. Re- present on the same side at the same time, both the fer to “KeySense Cluster Messages" in “Getting visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted. information.

NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system, the radio is also muted.

90 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) NOTE: NOTE: This setting gives you the most reaction time. The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system • The default status of FCW is “on”, this allows the provides the driver with audible and visual warnings system to warn you of a possible collision with the Medium vehicle in front of you. within the instrument cluster display, to warn the The default status of FCW is the “Medium” setting driver when it detects a potential frontal collision. • Changing the FCW status to “off” prevents the and “Warning And Braking” is in the “on” setting. The warnings are intended to provide the driver system from warning you of a possible collision This allows the system to warn the driver of a pos- with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the with the vehicle in front of you. If FCW is set to sible collision with the vehicle in front using audible/ potential collision. “off”, “FCW OFF” will be displayed in the instru- visual warnings and it applies autonomous braking. ment cluster display. NOTE: Near FCW monitors the information from the forward Changing FCW Status looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Con- Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, The FCW feature has three settings and can be troller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a for- allows the system to warn you of a potential frontal changed within the Uconnect System Screen: collision when you are much closer. ward collision. When the system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be pro- •Far This setting provides less reaction time than the vided with audible and visual warnings. • Medium “Far” setting, which allows for a more dynamic driv- ing experience. Turning FCW On Or Off • Near More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want to The forward collision button is located in the Far avoid frequent warnings may prefer this setting. Uconnect display in the controls settings. The far setting provides warnings for potential col- NOTE: • To turn the FCW system off, press the forward lisions more distant in front of the vehicle, allowing Changing the “Warning And Braking” status to “off” collision button once to turn the system off. the driver to have the most reaction time to avoid a prevents the system from providing autonomous brak- • To turn the FCW system back on, press the for- collision. ing, or additional brake support if the driver is not ward collision button again to turn the system on. More cautious drivers that do not mind frequent braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal warnings may prefer this setting. collision. “Warning And Braking” can be turned “off” in the Uconnect controls settings. 91 Refer to the Owner's Manual at www.mopar.com/ This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle NOTE: en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or has not been driven for at least three hours, or When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above further information. period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not the recommended cold placard pressure in order to

SAFETY exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring TelltaleLight off. WARNING! into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing The system will automatically update and the “Tire and Maintenance” for information on how to prop- Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not in- Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off erly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will tended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can once the system receives the updated tire pressures. also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal FCW detect every type of potential collision. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 min- and there should be no adjustment for this in- The driver has the responsibility to avoid a colli- utes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS creased pressure. sion by controlling the vehicle via braking and to receive this information. steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure For example, your vehicle may have a recom- to serious injury or death. if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warn- mended cold (parked for more than three hours) ing limit for any reason, including low temperature placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient Tire Pressure Monitor System effects and natural pressure loss through the tire. (TPMS) temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to ap- warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the proximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is vehicle recommended cold placard pressure. recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure Monitor- The tire pressure will vary with temperature by ap- tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring ing Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause proximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). TelltaleLight) illuminates, you must increase the tire the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi This means that when the outside temperature de- pressure to the recommended cold placard pres- (193 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale creases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure sure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell- Light” will still be on. In this situation, the “Tire should always be set based on cold inflation tire tale Light” to turn off. Pressure Monitoring TelltaleLight” will turn off only pressure. after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recom- mended cold placard pressure value. 92 NOTE: Premium System — If Equipped CAUTION! • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses • The TPMS has been optimized for the origi- care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a wireless technology with wheel rim mounted elec- nal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pres- tire failure or condition. tronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sen- sures and warning have been established for • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure sors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Unde- gauge while adjusting your tire pressure. stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver sirable system operation or sensor damage module. may result when using replacement equip- • Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. NOTE: style. The TPM sensor is not designed for use Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire It is particularly important for you to check the tire on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly poor overall system performance or sensor and stopping ability. and to maintain the proper pressure. damage. Customers are encouraged to use • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire main- The TPMS consists of the following components: OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature tenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to • Receiver Module operation. maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate • Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) reached the level to trigger illumination of the • Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor to become inoperable. After using an “Tire Pressure Monitoring TelltaleLight”. messages, which will display in the instrument aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended cluster display. that you take your vehicle to your authorized • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres- • Tire Pressure Monitoring TelltaleLight dealer to have your sensor function checked. sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure pressure in the tire. always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.

93 Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Should this occur, you should stop as soon as pos- Telltale Light” will no longer flash, and the “SER- Warnings sible and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in VICE TPM SYSTEM” message will no longer dis- a different color in the instrument cluster display play, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold plac- following: SAFETY Light” will illuminate in the instrument ard pressure value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" cluster and a chime will sound when tire message. Once the system receives the updated • Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tire pressures, the system will automatically update to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as tires. In addition, the instrument cluster display will if the ignition is in the ON/RUN position, the pres- the TPMS sensors. sure values in the graphic display in the instrument display an "Inflate to XX" message and a graphic • Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting cluster display and will return to their original color, showing the pressure values of each tire with the low that affects radio wave signals. and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring TelltaleLight” will tire pressure values in a different color. turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to • Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the housings. TPMS to receive this information. • Using tire chains on the vehicle. Service TPMS Warning • Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors. When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for Vehicles With Compact Spare — If Equipped 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system 1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the instru- pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the ment cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYS- TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the com- TEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and pact spare tire. then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a value to indicate which sensor is not being received. road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, warning limit, upon the next ignition cycle, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System providing the system fault still exists. If the system “TPM TelltaleLight” will remain on and a chime will fault no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring sound. In addition, the graphic in the instrument 94 cluster will still display a different color pressure TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped chime, the "TPM TelltaleLight" will flash on and off value and an "Inflate to XX" message. for 75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel message and then display pressure values in place above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPM Telltale and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors, of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the "SER- Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and such as when installing winter wheel and tire assem- VICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument blies on your vehicle. cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” displayed as long as no system fault exists. Todeactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel message for five seconds and then display and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not General Information dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) The following regulatory statement applies to all 4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this ve- sound, the “TPM TelltaleLight” will flash on and off above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the hicle: for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the "TPM TelltaleLight" will flash on and off for 75 sec- This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM onds and then remain on. The instrument cluster and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS stan- SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then dis- will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” mes- dard(s). Operation is subject to the following two play dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. sage and then display dashes (--) in place of the conditions: 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire pressure values. and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the com- (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS pact spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In and will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM addition, the “TPM TelltaleLight” will turn off and SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster but (2) This device must accept any interference re- the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure val- ceived, including interference that may cause unde- new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long ues. sired operation. as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warn- ing limit in any of the four active road tires. The Toreactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and NOTE: vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with Changes or modifications not expressly approved above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to TPM sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to by the party responsible for compliance could void receive this information. 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 95 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear- 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your facing child restraint) must ride in the front pas- vehicle has side air bags, and deployment oc- SYSTEMS senger seat, move the seat as far back as possible curs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into Some of the most important safety features in your and use the proper child restraint (refer to “Child the space between occupants and the door and Restraints” in this section for further occupants could be injured.

SAFETY vehicle are the restraint systems: information). 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be Occupant Restraint Systems Features 3. Children that are not big enough to wear the modified to accommodate a disabled person, • Seat Belt Systems vehicle seat belt properly (refer to “Child Re- refer to the “Customer Assistance” section for • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags straints” in this section for further information) customer service contact information. should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in • Child Restraints child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. WARNING! Some of the safety features described in this section Older children who do not use child restraints or may be standard equipment on some models, or belt-positioning booster seats should ride prop- • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in may be optional equipment on others. If you are not erly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. front of an air bag. A deploying passenger sure, ask your authorized dealer. 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt front air bag can cause death or serious injury behind them or under their arm. to a child 12 years or younger, including a child Important Safety Precautions in a rear-facing child restraint. 5. You should read the instructions provided with Please pay close attention to the information in this • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a ve- your child restraint to make sure that you are section. It tells you how to use your restraint system hicle with a rear seat. using it properly. properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly. Here are some simple steps you can take to mini- mize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag: 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front 1. Children 12 years old and under should always air bags room to inflate. ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

96 Seat Belt Systems Initial Indication The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied out- Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is board front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle poor driver and could cause a collision that includes will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard you. This can happen far away from home or on front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard their seat belts. your own street. front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when Change of Status the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/ Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a on and remain on until both outboard front seat equipped with outboard front passenger seat collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts re- seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will be- duce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury passenger seat is unoccupied. gin until the seat belts are buckled again. caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Every- one in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. BeltAlert Warning Sequence The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an (BeltAlert) the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat animal or other items are placed on the outboard Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped) passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be re- BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front strained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet har- driver and outboard front seat passenger (if passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the out- equipped with outboard front passenger seat board front passenger seat is unoccupied). The nesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the and cargo is properly stowed. Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermit- feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your tent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence the START or ON/RUN position. authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recom- has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will mend deactivating BeltAlert. remain on until the seat belts are buckled.

97 NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or WARNING! WARNING! outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with • In a collision, you and your passengers can instructions to wear your seat belt safely and outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuck- suffer much greater injuries if you are not to keep your passengers safe, too. properly buckled up. Youcan strike the interior • Two people should never be belted into a

SAFETY led the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can single seat belt. People belted together can passenger seat belts are buckled. be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure crash into one another in a collision, hurting you and others in your vehicle are buckled up one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder Lap/Shoulder Belts properly. belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or matter what their size. All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people rid- with lap/shoulder belts. ing in these areas are more likely to be seri- WARNING! The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during ously injured or killed. very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you vehicle that is not equipped with seats and of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belts. won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle. and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, part of your seat belt as low as possible and including the driver, should always wear their keep it snug. WARNING! seat belts whether or not an air bag is also • A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop- provided at their seating position to minimize erly.In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to the risk of severe injury or death in the event of sure the seat belt is flat against your body, more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags a crash. without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat work with your seat belt to restrain you prop- • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized erly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t de- your injuries in a collision much worse. You dealer immediately and have it fixed. ploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even might suffer internal injuries, or you could though you have air bags. even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these

98 WARNING! WARNING! • A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong • A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a buckle will not protect you properly. The lap collision and leave you with no protection. portion could ride too high on your body, Inspect the seat belt system periodically, possibly causing internal injuries. Always checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Dam- buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest aged parts must be replaced immediately. Do you. not disassemble or modify the seat belt sys- • A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you tem. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced properly. In a sudden stop, you could move after a collision. too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions • A seat belt that is worn under your arm is 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and dangerous. Your body could strike the inside adjust the seat. surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing Pulling Out The Seat Belt head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat 1 — Seat Belt as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp 2 — Seat Belt Buckle belt over your shoulder so that your strongest the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the bones will take the force in a collision. latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not allow the seat belt to go around your lap. protect you from injury during a collision. You the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a are more likely to hit your head in a collision if “click.” you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used to- gether.

99 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure across your hips, below your abdomen. To re- Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted move slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too lap/shoulder belt. tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the SAFETY A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under anchor point. the seat belt in a collision. 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is 180 degrees to create a fold that begins imme- comfortable and not resting on your neck. The diately above the latch plate. retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the 6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on slot at the top of the latch plate. the buckle. The seat belt will automatically re- Adjustable Anchorage tract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will belt to retract fully. twisted. prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower posi- Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage tion, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher po- In the front and second row outboard seats the sition. After you release the anchorage button, try shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push in position. or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves you best.

100 NOTE: Second Row Center (If Equipped) And Third The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature The second row center (if equipped) and third row allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in center seat belts feature a seat belt with a mini-latch the upward position without pushing or squeezing plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt to de- the release button. To verify the shoulder belt an- tach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded. chorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder The mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can belt anchorage until it is locked into position. then be stored out of the way in the headliner for added convenience to open up utilization of the WARNING! storage areas behind the front seats when the seat is • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make not occupied. your injuries in a collision much worse. You 1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch might suffer internal injuries, or you could plate from its stowed position in the headliner even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these slightly behind the second or third row seat. Mini-Latch Stowage instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. 2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt • Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder over the seat. and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is 3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the left comfortable and not resting on your neck. The head restraint. retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoul- der belt. • Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

101 4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert 9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until the buckle. you hear a “click.” 10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch

SAFETY plate into the center red slot on the mini- buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into its stowed position.

WARNING!

• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not Mini-Latch And Buckle Connected properly connected when the seat belt is used 7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the Connect Mini-Latch ToBuckle across your hips, below your abdomen. To re- move slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the risk of injury in a collision. • When reattaching the mini-latch plate and 5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt re- not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow belt to go around your lap. duces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a the preceding procedure to detach the mini- collision. 6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert latch plate and mini-buckle, untwist the web- the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it bing, and reattach the mini-latch plate and “click.” is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The mini-buckle. retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.

102 Seat Belt Extender Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdo- WARNING! men and across the strong bones of the hips. Place If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the when the webbing is fully extended and the adjust- when not needed. neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back able upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is or under the arm. in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can Seat Belts And Pregnant Women provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Seat Belt Pretensioner Extender should be used only if the existing seat The front seat belt system is equipped with preten- belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Ex- sioning devices that are designed to remove slack tender is not required for a different occupant, it from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These must be removed. devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a WARNING! collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. • ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi- cally required in order to properly fit the origi- NOTE: nal seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat These devices are not a substitute for proper seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance be- belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still tween the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender Pregnant Women And Seat Belts must be worn snugly and positioned properly. buckle and the center of the occupant’s body The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including is LESS than 6 inches. Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an • Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pre- can increase the risk of serious injury or death accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn tensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender child if they are wearing a seat belt. immediately. when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions.

103 Energy Management Feature Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of web- The front seat belt system is equipped with an bing necessary to comfortably wrap around the Energy Management feature that may help further occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. the buckle until you hear a "click." SAFETY The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still re- Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors tract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use (ALR) the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child re- The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are straint is installed in a seating position that has a seat equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Re- belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and tractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child re- under should always be properly restrained in a straint system. For additional information, refer to 0502122056US vehicle with a rear seat. “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat 7 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section of this (ALR) Locations WARNING! manual. The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each seating position. ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in Retractor front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child If the passenger seating position is equipped with an in a rear-facing child restraint. ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a ve- the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfort- hicle with a rear seat. ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts.

104 How ToEngage The Automatic Locking Mode Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped WARNING! 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward • The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the a park stitch to raise the latch plate for easier access until the entire seat belt is extracted. switchable Automatic Locking Retractor to occupants. If the park stitch interferes with the (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function tight installation of a child restraint, slide the latch 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt is not working properly when checked accord- plate over the stitching to shorten the lap portion of retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indi- ing to the procedures in the Service Manual. the belt and install the car seat normally. When the cates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Lock- • Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could car seat is removed from the vehicle, slide the latch ing Mode. increase the risk of injury in collisions. plate above the park stitch to enable occupants to How ToDisengage The Automatic Locking Mode • Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to latch the seatbelt securely. restrain occupants who are wearing the seat Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and belt or children who are using booster seats. allow it to retract completely to disengage the Au- The locked mode is only used to install rear- tomatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sen- facing or forward-facing child restraints that sitive (emergency) locking mode. have a harness for restraining the child.

Seat Belt Park Stitch Location

105 Third Row Stow Clip - If Equipped • Steering Wheel and Column WARNING! Your vehicle may be equipped with a stow clip on • Instrument Panel Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the the lower trim behind the third row. This clip is used • Knee Impact Bolsters to hold the seat belt out of the path of the power third row stow clip when using the seat belt to

SAFETY restrain an occupant. The seat belt will not be • Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags folding third row seat. Only place the seat belt positioned properly on the occupant and they webbing in this clip while folding and opening the • Seat Belt Buckle Switch could be more seriously injured in an accident as seat. Do not leave the webbing behind the clip a result. • Supplemental Side Air Bags when using the belt to restrain an occupant. • Supplemental Knee Air Bags Supplemental Restraint Systems • Front and Side Impact Sensors (SRS) • Seat Belt Pretensioners Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or • Seat Track Position Sensors may be optional equipment on others. If you are not • Occupant Classification System sure, ask your authorized dealer. Air Bag Warning Light The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller The ORC monitors the readiness of the elec- (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and intercon- tronic parts of the air bag system whenever the necting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN posi- System Components. Your vehicle may be tion. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in equipped with the following Air Bag System Com- the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and ponents: the air bags will not inflate. Third Row Stow Clip Air Bag System Components The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bag system even if the • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) battery loses power or it becomes disconnected • Air Bag Warning Light prior to deployment. 106 The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the NOTE: Redundant Air Bag Warning Light instrument panel for approximately four to eight If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine re- If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is lated gauges are not working, the Occupant Re- which could affect the Supplemental Restraint Sys- straint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, tem (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light this condition the air bags may not be ready to the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redun- inflate for your protection. Have an authorized detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it dant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the dealer service the air bag system immediately. turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momen- fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound tarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning alert you if the light comes on again after initial WARNING! Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If startup. Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your in- the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illumi- strument panel could mean you won’t have the authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. nate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the For additional information regarding the Redun- malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag light does not come on as a bulb check when the dant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting To system. The diagnostics also record the nature of ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start Know Your Instrument Panel” section of this the malfunction. While the air bag system is de- the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system im- manual. signed to be maintenance free, if any of the follow- mediately. ing occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval. • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit- tently or remains on while driving. 107 Front Air Bags WARNING! This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and front passenger. The • Being too close to the steering wheel or instru- front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt ment panel during front air bag deployment SAFETY restraint systems. The driver front air bag is could cause serious injury, including death. Air mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort- ably extending your arms to reach the steering passenger front air bag is mounted in the instru- wheel or instrument panel. ment panel, above the glove compartment. The • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed front of an air bag. A deploying passenger on the air bag covers. front air bag can cause death or serious injury Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations to a child 12 years or younger, including a child 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags in a rear-facing child restraint. 2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/ • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a ve- Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag hicle with a rear seat. 3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/ Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive in- formation from the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system components.

108 The first stage inflator is triggered immediately dur- some that may produce substantial vehicle damage ing an impact that requires air bag deployment. A WARNING! — for example, some pole collisions, truck under- low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A • No objects should be placed over or near the rides, and angle offset collisions. higher energy output is used for more severe colli- air bag on the instrument panel or steering sions. On the other hand, depending on the type and wheel because any such objects could cause location of impact, front air bags may deploy in This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects enough to cause the air bag to inflate. produce a severe initial deceleration. whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is • Do not put anything on or around the air bag buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the covers or attempt to open them manually. You Because air bag sensors measure vehicle decelera- inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags. may damage the air bags and you could be tion over time, vehicle speed and damage by them- injured because the air bags may no longer be selves are not good indicators of whether or not an This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or functional. The protective covers for the air air bag should have deployed. front passenger seat track position sensors that may bag cushions are designed to open only when adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all the air bags are inflating. collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in Bags based upon seat position. • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to position, away from an inflating air bag. This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is work with your seat belt to restrain you prop- When the ORC detects a collision requiring the designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air erly.In some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s seated all. Always wear your seat belts even though quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the weight input, as determined by the OCS. you have air bags. front air bags. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper Front Air Bag Operation right side of the instrument panel separate and fold Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including and front passenger. 109 Occupant Classification System (OCS) — The ORC may reduce the inflation rate of the Front Passenger Seat Front Passenger Air Front Passenger Seat Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment Occupant Status Bag Output based on occupant classification. In order for the The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety Rear-facing child Reduced-power OCS to operate as designed, it is important for the system for this vehicle. It is designed to provide restraint deployment front passenger to be seated properly and properly SAFETY Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output appro- Child, including a child Reduced-power wearing the seat belt. priate to the occupant’s seated weight, as deter- in a forward-facing child deployment OR restraint or booster seat* Full-power deployment mined by the OCS. The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may Properly seated adult Full-power deployment The Occupant Classification System (OCS) OR reduced-power reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Ad- consists of the following: deployment vanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that: Unoccupied seat Reduced-power • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) • The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very deployment • Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and light objects on it; or Sensor located in the front passenger seat • The front passenger seat is occupied by a small * It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, • Air Bag Warning Light passenger, including a child; or allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in Occupant Classification Module (OCM) • The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear- the front passenger seat and never install a child And Sensor facing child restraint; or restraint system, including a rear-facing child re- The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is • The front passenger is not properly seated or his straint, in the front passenger seat. located underneath the front passenger seat. The or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat cush- time. ion foam. Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM communicates this infor- mation to the ORC.

110 • Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet The front passenger’s seated weight must be prop- WARNING! comfortably on or near the floor erly positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in • Sitting with their back against the seatback and the to do so may result in serious injury or death. The front of an air bag. A deploying passenger seatback in an upright position OCS determines the most probable classification front air bag can cause death or serious injury of the occupant that it detects. The OCS will detect to a child 12 years or younger, including a child the front passenger’s decreased or increased seated in a rear-facing child restraint. weight, which may result in an adjusted inflation rate • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a ve- of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a col- hicle with a rear seat. lision. This does not mean that the OCS is working • Children 12 years or younger should always improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. seated weight on the front passenger seat may re- sult in a reduced-power deployment of the Passen- The OCS determines the front passenger’s most ger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing the front probable classification. The OCS estimates the passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seated weight on the front passenger seat and seat may result in a full-power deployment of the where that weight is located. The OCS communi- Seated Properly Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. cates the classification status to the ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine whether Lighter Weight Passengers Examples of improper front passenger seating in- the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation (Including Small Adults) clude: rate should be adjusted. When a lighter weight passenger, including a small • The front passenger’s weight is transferred to an- In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS other part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or important for the front passenger to be seated may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Ad- instrument panel). properly and properly wearing the seat belt. Prop- vanced Front Air Bag. This does not mean that the • The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or erly seated passengers are: OCS is working improperly. turns to face the rear of the vehicle. • Sitting upright Do not decrease OR increase the front passen- • The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full • Facing forward ger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat upright position. 111 • The front passenger carries or holds an object while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.). • Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat. SAFETY • Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat and center console. • Accessories that may change the seated weight on the front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat. • Anything that may decrease or increase the front Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly passenger’s seated weight. The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly seated weight input, for example:

Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly

112 The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument The following requirements must be strictly fol- WARNING! panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to lowed: classify the front passenger seat status. A malfunc- • If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or • Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly tion in the OCS may affect the operation of the air adult in the front passenger seat is seated im- or components in any way. bag system. properly, the occupant may provide an output • Do not use prior or future model year seat covers signal to the OCS that is different from the If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come or cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for occupant’s properly seated weight input. This on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes the specific model being repaired. Always use the may result in serious injury or death in a collision. on as you drive, take the vehicle to your authorized correct seat cover and cushion specified for the • Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, dealer for service immediately. vehicle. with the seatback in an upright position, your The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS • Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an back against the seatback, sitting upright, fac- components that may affect the Passenger Ad- aftermarket seat cover or cushion. ing forward, in the center of the seat, with your vanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS feet comfortably on or near the floor. • Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat. • Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back- to properly classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS components must function as • At no time should any Supplemental Restraint packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front System (SRS) component or SRS related compo- passenger seat. Holding an object may pro- designed. Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components, assembly, or to nent or fastener be modified or replaced with any vide an output signal to the OCS that is dif- part except those which are approved by FCA US the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion ferent than the occupant’s properly seated LLC. weight input, which may result in serious injury needs service for any reason, take the vehicle to or death in a collision. your authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC ap- • Placing an object on the floor under the front proved seat accessories may be used. passenger seat may prevent the OCS from work- ing properly, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor under the front passenger seat.

113 Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) WARNING! WARNING! are located in the outboard side of the front seats. • Unapproved modifications or service proce- • Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee The SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or dures to the passenger seat assembly, its re- impact bolsters in any way. “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the

SAFETY lated components, seat cover or cushion may • Do not mount any accessories to the knee seats. inadvertently change the air bag deployment impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant in case of a frontal collision. This could result in citizen band radios, etc. injury during certain side impacts, in addition to the death or serious injury to the front passenger if injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts the vehicle is involved in a collision. A modi- Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger and body structure. fied vehicle may not comply with required Knee Air Bags Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards (FM- VSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Standards (CMVSS). Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel • If it is necessary to modify the air bag system below the steering column and a Supplemental Pas- for persons with disabilities, contact your au- senger Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument thorized dealer. panel below the glove compartment. The Supple- mental Knee Air Bags provide enhanced protection Knee Impact Bolsters during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air bags. The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the Supplemental Side Air Bags front occupants for improved interaction with the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags front air bags. (SABs) This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat- Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs). Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag 114 When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The occupants if they are not belted and seated prop- inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into erly, or if items are positioned in the area where the the space between the occupant and the door. The SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a of injury from a deploying air bag. high force that it could injure occupants if they are The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the complete ejection of vehicle occupants through area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even side windows in certain side impact events. greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. WARNING! WARNING! • Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or Do not use accessory seat covers or place ob- other cargo up high enough to block the de- jects between you and the Side Air Bags; the ployment of the SABICs. The trim covering performance could be adversely affected and/or Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable above the side windows where the SABIC and objects could be pushed into you, causing seri- Curtain (SABIC) Label Location its deployment path are located should remain ous injury. free from any obstructions. SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other • In order for the SABICs to work as intended, injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains do not install any accessory items in your ve- certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduc- (SABICs) hicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an tion potential provided by the seat belts and body aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air structure. Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). add roof racks that require permanent attach- The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the (SABICs) are located above the side windows. The edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the vehicle for any reason. trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” window. or “AIRBAG.”

115 Side Impacts WARNING! WARNING! The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in cer- • Being too close to the Side Air Bags during • Occupants, including children, who are up tain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Control- deployment could cause you to be severely against or very close to Side Air Bags can be ler (ORC) determines whether the deployment of injured or killed. SAFETY seriously injured or killed. Occupants, includ- the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is • Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead ing children, should never lean on or sleep appropriate, based on the severity and type of col- to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side against the door, side windows, or area where lision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an determining the appropriate response to impact you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags infant or child restraint. events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt • Seat belts (and child restraints where appro- Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during even though you have Side Air Bags. priate) are necessary for your protection in all impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protec- collisions. They also help keep you in position, tion. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy inde- NOTE: away from an inflating Side Air Bag. Toget the pendently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu- Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. pants must wear their seat belts properly and right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is sit upright with their backs against the seats. Rollover Events not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags Children must be properly restrained in a child should have deployed. Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for rollover events. The ORC determines whether the The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side colli- the size of the child. deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular sions, including some collisions at certain angles, or rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity some side collisions that do not impact the area of and type of collision. Vehicledamage by itself is not the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags WARNING! a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions • Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not should have deployed. where the front air bags deploy. lean against the door or window. Sit upright in Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt the center of the seat. restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. 116 The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover • Seat Belt Buckle Switch They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. events. The rollover sensing system determines if a • Supplemental Side Air Bags However, if you haven’t healed significantly within rollover event may be in progress and whether de- a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your ployment is appropriate. In the event the vehicle • Supplemental Knee Air Bags doctor immediately. experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and • Front and Side Impact Sensors • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke- deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate, the like particles. The particles are a normal by- rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt • Seat Belt Pretensioners product of the process that generates the non- pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. • Seat Track Position Sensors toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or • Occupant Classification System particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. complete ejection of vehicle occupants through If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with If A Deployment Occurs side windows in certain rollover or side impact cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to events. The front air bags are designed to deflate immedi- fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the Air Bag System Components ately after deployment. garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning. NOTE: NOTE: Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni- Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all deployed. If you are involved in another collision, tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring collisions. This does not mean something is wrong associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo- with the air bag system. the air bags will not be in place to protect you. nents listed below: If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, WARNING! • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) any or all of the following may occur: • Air Bag Warning Light • The air bag material may sometimes cause abra- Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the • Steering Wheel and Column sions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt • Instrument Panel similar to friction rope burns or those you might retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant • Knee Impact Bolsters get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. Restraint Controller System serviced as well. • Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags They are not caused by contact with chemicals. 117 NOTE: Enhanced Accident Response System Reset WARNING! • Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior Procedure of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. After an event occurs requiring activation of the trim cover or the upper right side of the instru- • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to Enhanced Accident Response System, when the ment panel. Do not modify the front bumper, SAFETY an authorized dealer immediately. system is active, a “Service Hybrid Electric Vehicle vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket System” message will be displayed on the instru- side steps or running boards. Enhanced Accident Response System ment cluster. The vehicle is not drivable in this state. • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the In the event of an impact, if the communication In order to reset the High Voltage Battery and air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag network remains intact, and the power remains in- Engine, the vehicle must be towed to an authorized system. tact, depending on the nature of the event, the dealer immediately to be inspected and have the • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Enhanced Accident Response System reset. Accident Response System perform the following bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden- functions: In order to immediately reset the Hazard Flashers, tally or may not function properly if modifica- Interior Lights, Power Door Locks, HVAC Blower tions are made. Take your vehicle to an autho- • Cut off battery power to the motor. Motor, the ignition switch must be changed from rized dealer for any air bag system service. If • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. your seat, including your trim cover and cush- power or until the hazard light button is pressed. ion, needs to be serviced in any way (including The hazard lights can be deactivated by pressing Maintaining YourAir Bag System removal or loosening/tightening of seat at- the hazard light button. tachment bolts), take the vehicle to your au- WARNING! thorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved • Turnon the interior lights, which remain on as long seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary as the battery has power. • Modifications to any part of the air bag system to modify the air bag system for persons with • Unlock the power door locks. could cause it to fail when you need it. You disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the com- ponents or wiring, including adding any kind

118 Event Data Recorder (EDR) These data can help provide a better understanding Child Restraints of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at occur. (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in all times, including babies and children. Every state certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an NOTE: in the United States, and every Canadian province, air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a requires that small children ride in proper restraint that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s sys- non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are re- systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted tems performed. The EDR is designed to record corded by the EDR under normal driving conditions for ignoring it. data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and Children 12 years or younger should ride properly for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or crash location) are recorded. However, other par- buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record ties, such as law enforcement, could combine the crash statistics, children are safer when properly such data as: EDR data with the type of personally identifying restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. • How various systems in your vehicle were operat- data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. ing; To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip- WARNING! • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the belts were buckled/fastened; EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufac- In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a turer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that projectile inside the vehicle. The force required • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the have the special equipment, can read the informa- to hold even an infant on your lap could become accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, tion if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. so great that you could not hold the child, no • How fast the vehicle was traveling. matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

119 There are different sizes and types of restraints for Before buying any restraint system, make sure that NOTE: children from newborn size to the child almost large it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable • For additional information, refer to enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the Safety Standards. You should also make sure that www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm or call: child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it. 1–888–327–4236

SAFETY the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and • Canadian residents should refer to Transport follow all the instructions and warnings in the child Canada’s website for additional information: restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels at- http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/ tached to the child restraint. safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Children who are two years old or younger and who Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Re- Infants and Toddlers have not reached the height or weight limits of their straint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle child restraint Children who are at least two years old or who have Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Har- Small Children outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear- ness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle facing child restraint Children who have outgrown their forward-facing Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat Larger Children child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown Children TooLarge for Child Restraints Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle the height or weight limit of their booster seat

120 Infant And Child Restraints WARNING! WARNING! Safety experts recommend that children ride rear- facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear until they reach either the height or weight limit of front of an air bag. A deploying passenger support leg in this vehicle. The floor of this ve- their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child front air bag can cause death or serious injury hicle is not designed to manage the crash forces restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and to a child 12 years or younger, including a child of this type of car seat. In a crash, the support leg convertible child seats. in a rear-facing child restraint. may not function as it was designed by the car • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a ve- seat manufacturer, and your child may be more The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the hicle with a rear seat. severely injured as a result. vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.

121 Older Children And Child Restraints Children TooLarge For Booster Seats WARNING! Children who are two years old or who have out- Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder grown their rear-facing convertible child seat can • Improper installation can lead to failure of an belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing infant or child restraint. It could come loose in to bend over the front of the seat when their back is SAFETY child seats and convertible child seats used in the a collision. The child could be badly injured or against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a forward-facing direction are for children who are killed. Follow the child restraint manufactur- rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide er’s directions exactly when installing an infant over two years old or who have outgrown the rear- whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt or child restraint. facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing alone: convertible child seat. Children should remain in a • After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long do not move the vehicle seat forward or rear- 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back as possible, up to the highest weight or height al- ward because it can loosen the child restraint of the vehicle seat? lowed by the child seat. attachments. Remove the child restraint be- 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the fore adjusting the vehicle seat position. When front of the vehicle seat – while the child is still All children whose weight or height is above the the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall sitting all the way back? forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a the child restraint. belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat • When your child restraint is not in use, secure 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH between their neck and arm? bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, back is against the seatback, they should use a not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden touching the child’s thighs and not the stomach? belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt- stop or accident, it could strike the occupants positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole the seat belt. trip? If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. 122 A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face WARNING! or neck, move the child closer to the center of the Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the belt on the child correctly. shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Weight Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below of the Child + Child LATCH – Lower Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Seat Belt + TopTether Restraint Anchors Only Anchors + TopTether Anchor Anchor Rear-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs XX Restraint (29.5 kg) Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs X Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs XX Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs X Restraint (29.5 kg)

123 Lower Anchors And TethersFor CHildren There are two lower anchorages located at the back LATCH Positions For Installing (LATCH) Restraint System of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and Child Restraints In This Vehicle one top tether anchorage located behind the seat- ing position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the ve- SAFETY hicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information. LATCH Label

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for 0502122056US installing LATCH-equipped child seats. 7 Passenger LATCH Positions Second Row Quad — Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) — TopTetherAnchorage Symbol

124 Frequently Asked Questions Use the LATCH anchorage system until the com- What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the bined weight of the child and the child restraint is child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage sys- 65 lbs (29.5 kg) 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor tem to attach the child restraint? instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward- Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be facing child restraint. used together to attach a rear-facing or forward- No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchor- facing child restraint? ages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more informa- tion. Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have Can two child restraints be attached using a common dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt No lower LATCH anchorage? to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an out- board position. The child seat may touch the back of the front pas- Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of senger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also Ye s the front passenger seat? allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information. The 2nd row head restraints are removable. The 3rd Can the head restraints be removed? Yes row center head restraint is removable, but the 3rd row outboard head restraints are not removable.

125 NOTE: Locating The LATCH Anchorages If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint inter- The lower anchorages are round bars that are feres with the installation of the child restraint, the found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets head restraint may be folded and the child seat the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the installed in front of it. SAFETY seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will WARNING! easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap Always make sure the head restraint is in its between the seatback and seat cushion. upright position when the seat is to be used by an occupant who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered posi- tion could result in serious injury or death in a collision. Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded 1 — Folded Headrest 2 — Child Restraint

LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)

126 Locating The Upper TetherAnchorages There are tether strap anchorages located behind all second row seating positions. The third row has a tether anchor on the 40% seat for the right outboard position and in the center of the 60% seat for either the center or left outboard seating posi- tion. All tether anchorages are located on the back of the seat, near the floor.

LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Bench LATCH Anchorages (Third Row Anchorages Shown) 60/40 Anchorages Shown)

TetherStrap Anchorage (Second Row Anchorage Shown)

127 Center Seat LATCH This vehicle has 4 lower LATCH anchorages in the third row, rear seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard position behind the front SAFETY passenger (1). Anchorages C and D are used for the center seating position (2). The left outboard posi- tion (3) does not have lower anchorages. Do not install a child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is not a LATCH position in your vehicle.

TetherStrap Anchorages (Second Row TetherStrap Anchorages (Third Row Bench Anchorage Shown) 60/40 Anchorage Shown)

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the con- nection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child re- straints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap Center Seat LATCH Positions after it is attached to the anchorage.

128 If a child restraint installed in the center position ToInstall A LATCH-Compatible Child 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the out- Restraint to the top tether anchorage. See the section board position, do not use that outboard position. If “Installing Child Restraints Using the TopTether If the selected seating position has a Switchable a child seat in the center position blocks the out- Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow board LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a the seat belt, following the instructions below. See anchor. child seat in that outboard position. the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt restraint rearward and downward into the seat. WARNING! each seating position has. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. • Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCH- 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on compatible child restraint in the center seating the tether strap of the child seat so that you can 6. Testthat the child restraint is installed tightly by position (2). Do not install a LATCH- more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the pulling back and forth on the child seat at the compatible child restraint using anchorages B vehicle anchorages. belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch and C. This is not a LATCH-compatible posi- 2. Place the child seat between the lower anchor- (25.4 mm) in any direction. tion in your vehicle. ages for that seating position. For some second • Never use the same lower anchorage to attach row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / How ToStow An Unused Switchable-ALR more than one child restraint. Please refer to or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the (ALR) Seat Belt: "Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in When using the LATCH attaching system to install Restraint System" for typical installation in- the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear- a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not structions. most position to make room for the child seat. being used by other occupants or being used to You may also move the front seat forward to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a Always follow the directions of the child restraint allow more room for the child seat. manufacturer when installing your child re- child if they play with it and accidentally lock the 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the straint. Not all child restraint systems will be in- seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint child restraint to the lower anchorages in the stalled as described here. using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt be- selected seating position. hind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child re- straint installation, instead of buckling it behind the 129 child restraint, route the seat belt through the child Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing WARNING! restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock Child Restraints In This Vehicle the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that • Improper installation or failure to properly se- the seat belts are not toys and that they should not cure a child restraint can lead to failure of the

SAFETY play with them. restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. WARNING! • Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s di- rections exactly when installing an infant or • Improper installation of a child restraint to the child restraint. LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are killed. Follow the child restraint manufactur- equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Re- er’s directions exactly when installing an infant tractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap por- or child restraint. tion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint • Child restraint anchorages are designed to so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The withstand only those loads imposed by ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no cir- by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and 0502122056US cumstances are they to be used for adult seat then letting the webbing retract back into the re- belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items tractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking 7 Passenger Quad Seat Automatic Locking or equipment to the vehicle. noise while the webbing is pulled back into the Retractor (ALR) Locations retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Re- Retractor Seat Belt tractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Sys- — TopTetherAnchorage Symbol tems” for additional information on ALR. Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of Please see the table below and the following sec- a lap/shoulder belt. tions for more information.

130 Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt child restraint) for using the TetherAnchor with the Weight limit of the Child Restraint to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint? recommended weight limit of the child restraint. Contact between the front passenger seat and the Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of Ye s child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufac- the front passenger seat? turer also allows contact. The 2nd row head restraints are removable. The 3rd Can the head restraints be removed? Yes row center head restraint is removable, but the 3rd row outboard head restraints are not removable. Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with No belt against the belt path of the child restraint? an ALR retractor.

NOTE: If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint inter- WARNING! feres with the installation of the child restraint, the Always make sure the head restraint is in its head restraint may be folded and the child seat upright position when the seat is to be used by an installed in front of it. occupant who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered posi- tion could result in serious injury or death in a collision.

131 Installing A Child Restraint With A Switch- 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR): retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in Child restraint systems are designed to be secured the belt path. in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of SAFETY a lap/shoulder belt. 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” WARNING! 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat. • Improper installation or failure to properly se- 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder cure a child restraint can lead to failure of the part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat restraint. The child could be badly injured or belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow killed. the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As • Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s di- the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking rections exactly when installing an infant or Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded sound. This means the seat belt is now in the child restraint. Automatic Locking mode. 1 – Folded Headrest 2 – Child Restraint 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is position. For some second row seats, you may locked, you should not be able to pull out any need to recline the seat and/or raise the head webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be step 5. moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten may wish to move it to its rear-most position to the lap portion around the child restraint while make room for the child seat. Youmay also move you push the child restraint rearward and down- the front seat forward to allow more room for the ward into the vehicle seat. child seat.

132 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped If the park stitch interferes with the lock-off features seating position has a top tether anchorage, con- of the child restraint, do not use the lock-off feature. The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with nect the tether strap to the anchorage and Instead, switch the seat belt to the locking mode, as a park stitch to raise the latch plate for easier access tighten the tether strap. See the section “Install- described in the steps above or move the car seat to to occupants. If the park stitch interferes with the ing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether An- a different seating position. chorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor. tight installation of a child restraint, slide the latch plate over the stitching to shorten the lap portion of 9. Testthat the child restraint is installed tightly by the belt and install the car seat following the steps pulling back and forth on the child seat at the above. When the car seat is removed from the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch vehicle, slide the latch plate above the park stitch to (25.4 mm) in any direction. enable occupants to latch the seatbelt securely. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

Seat Belt Park Stitch

Seat Belt Park Stitch Location

133 Installing Child Restraints Using the Top 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan TetherAnchorage to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat for- WARNING! ward to provide better access to the tether an-

SAFETY chorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car that seating position, move the child restraint to seat to any location in front of the car seat, another position in the vehicle if one is available. including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether an- chorages in your vehicle. TopTetherAnchorage Locations 3rd Row

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjust- able rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under TopTetherAnchorage Locations 2nd Row the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.

134 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint 2. If the car seat is in the center, raise the center to the top tether anchorage as shown in the WARNING! head restraint and route the tether strap around diagram. the inboard (left) side of the head restraint sup- • An incorrectly anchored tether strap could port posts, as shown in the diagram. 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the lead to increased head motion and possible child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. injury to the child. Use only the anchorage 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint position directly behind the child seat to se- to the top tether anchorage as shown in the cure a child restraint top tether strap. diagram. • If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the make sure the tether strap does not slip into child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.

Second And Third Row TetherAttachment The tether anchorage found on the back of the 60% seat in the third row may be used by either the left outboard or the center seating position. Only tether one child restraint to the tether anchorage at a time. To connect the tether strap hook to the tether an- chorage for either seating position on the 60% third Rear Seat TetherStrap Attachment (Second Row Anchorage Shown) row seat: 1. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. Center TetherAttachment – 3rd Row

135 SAFETY

Outboard TetherAttachments – 3rd Row TetherAttachment – 2nd Row Rear Seat TetherStrap Attachment (Second Row Anchorage Shown)

WARNING! Do not connect the tether strap for more than one child restraint to the tether anchorage on the 60% seat in the third row. This anchorage is intended for one child restraint at a time.

136 Transporting Pets SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your WARNING! pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and Transporting Passengers possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE braking or in a collision. carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and CARGO AREA. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat and can eventually poison you. Toavoid breath- belts. WARNING! ing (CO), follow these safety tips: • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in • Do not leave children or animals inside parked confined areas any longer than needed to vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up move your vehicle in or out of the area. may cause serious injury or death. • If you are required to drive with the trunk/ • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli- windows are closed and the climate control sion, people riding in these areas are more BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO likely to be seriously injured or killed. NOT use the recirculation mode. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat the engine running, adjust your heating or belts. cooling controls to force outside air into the • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. and using a seat belt properly.

137 The best protection against carbon monoxide entry Safety Checks You Should Make while driving, have your authorized dealer service into the vehicle body is a properly maintained en- Inside The Vehicle the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Re- gine exhaust system. straint Systems” in “Safety” for further information. Seat Belts Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking Defroster SAFETY exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be de- for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must tected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent place the blower control on high speed. Youshould mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and modify the system. be able to feel the air directed against the wind- adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deterio- Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a shield. See your authorized dealer for service if your rated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be re- defroster is inoperable. connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep placed after a collision if they have been damaged Floor Mat Safety Information into the passenger compartment. In addition, in- (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is spect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condi- Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as re- tion, replace the seat belt. Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the quired. operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Air Bag Warning Light Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition position and interfere with the accelerator, brake or switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your ve- either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on hicle in other ways. while driving, have the system inspected at your authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on

138 WARNING! WARNING! WARNING! An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or • ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the • If the vehicle carpet has been removed and stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasten- driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer- re-installed, always properly attach carpet to ers may cause your floor mat to interfere with the ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and cause a engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to each pedal to check for interference with the INJURY or DEATH: check for interference. If your floor mat inter- accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then re- • ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not install the floor mats. using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from • It is recommended to only use mild soap and your floor mat upside down or turn your floor the vehicle and place the floor mat in your water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is se- trunk. always check your floor mat has been properly cured using the floor mat fasteners on a regu- • ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on installed and is secured to your vehicle using lar basis. the passenger’s side floor area. the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat. • ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING • ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE slide into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is moving. Objects can become before installing any other floor mat. NEVER trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch install or stack an additional floor mat on top pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle con- of an existing floor mat. trol. • ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your • NEVER place any objects under the floor mat vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could be properly attached and secured to your ve- change the position of the floor mat and may hicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, only cause interference with the accelerator, brake, use a FCA approved floor mat for the specific or clutch pedals. make, model, and year of your vehicle.

139 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Lights Fluid Leaks Make Outside The Vehicle Have someone observe the operation of brake Check area under the vehicle after overnight park- Tires lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. ing for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid

SAFETY Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven the instrument panel. leaks are suspected. The cause should be located wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other and corrected immediately. objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the Door Latches tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tight- Check for proper closing, latching, and locking. ness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

140 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING AND OPERATING STARTINGTHEENGINE...... 142 ACC On/Off ...... 149 Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . .159 Normal Starting ...... 142 ToSet A Desired ACC Speed ...... 150 ParkSense System Usage Precautions .....160 After Starting ...... 142 ToVary The Speed Setting ...... 150 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST ToTurn Off The Vehicle Using ToAccelerate For Passing ...... 151 SYSTEM ...... 161 ENGINE START/STOP Button ...... 142 ToResume ...... 151 LANESENSE...... 162 ToTurnOff...... 152 ENGINE BREAK-IN LaneSense Operation ...... 162 Distance Setting (ACC Only) ...... 152 RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 143 Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...... 162 ACC Operation At Stop ...... 152 PARKBRAKE...... 143 LaneSense Warning Message ...... 163 Changing Modes (ACC Only) ...... 152 Electric Park Brake (EPB) ...... 143 Changing LaneSense Status...... 163 General Information ...... 153 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . .145 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — AMERA — IF EQUIPPED ...... 164 Hybrid Transmission ...... 146 IF EQUIPPED ...... 154 SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SPEED CONTROL...... 147 ParkSense Sensors ...... 155 SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...... 165 ToActivate...... 148 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ...... 155 REFUELING THE VEHICLE...... 167 ToSet A Desired Speed...... 148 Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist ToVary The Speed Setting ...... 148 System ...... 156 Materials Added ToFuel ...... 170 ToAccelerate For Passing ...... 149 ParkSense System Usage Precautions...... 156 TRAILER TOWING ...... 170 ToResume Speed ...... 149 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR RECREATIONAL TOWING ToDeactivate ...... 149 PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . .157 (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . .170 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ParkSense Sensors ...... 158 TowingThis Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle. .170 (ACC)...... 149 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ...... 159 Recreational Towing— All Models ...... 171

141 STARTING THE ENGINE without the engine running), which may include After Starting the start of the engine depending on conditions The vehicle will optimize the energy efficiency and NOTE: such as battery state of charge and vehicle either turn on the engine or operate in electric In case the ignition switch does not change with the temperature. push of a button, the key fob may have a low or mode. 4. If you wish to stop the vehicle from achieving dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can Drive Ready mode, push the button again. ToTurn Off The Vehicle Using be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose ENGINE START/STOP Button side of the key fob (side opposite of the Emergency ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — Key) against the ENGINE START/STOP button With Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In 1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and and push to operate the ignition switch. PARK Or NEUTRAL Position) release the ENGINE START/STOP button. 2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF Normal Starting The ENGINE START/STOP button operates simi- lar to an ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF, position. NOTE: ACC and RUN. Tochange the ignition modes with- 3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is out starting the vehicle and use the accessories, START/STOP button must be held for two sec- obtained without pumping or pressing the accelera- follow these steps: onds or three short pushes in a row with the tor pedal. 1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF mode. vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the

STARTING AND OPERATING ToTurnOn The VehicleUsing ENGINE START/ vehicle will shut off. The ignition switch position 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once STOP Button will remain in the ACC position until the gear to place the ignition in the ACC mode (instru- selector is in PARK and the button is pushed 1. The transmission must be in PARK or ment cluster will display “ACC”). twice to the OFF position. If the gear selector is NEUTRAL. 3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a sec- not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ond time to place the ignition in the RUN mode button is pushed once, the instrument cluster ENGINE START/STOP button once. (instrument cluster will display “ON/RUN”). display will display a “Vehicle Not In Park” mes- 3. The vehicle will go into Drive Ready mode (si- 4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third sage and the vehicle will remain running. Never lent start, and “ready” is indicated on the cluster time to return the ignition to the OFF mode leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it (instrument cluster will display “OFF”). could roll. 142 NOTE: Drive moderately during the first 300 miles PARK BRAKE This vehicle is equipped with an automatic shut- (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds down feature. If the vehicle is left in a “READY” up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. Electric Park Brake (EPB) state (vehicle running) with the shifter in “PARK” for While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within Yourvehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake one hour after the driver exits, it will automatically the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and turn off the vehicle. Notifications have been in- break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low some additional features that make the parking cluded in this feature to raise awareness of the timed gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. brake more convenient and useful. The Electric event: the instrument cluster will display “Ready to The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory Park Brake Switch is located in the integrated center drive”, and will be accompanied by three audible is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. stack. chimes while exiting the vehicle. The interior warn- Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated ings will occur regardless if the key fob remains in climate conditions under which vehicle operations the vehicle or is removed. Additionally, the horn will will occur. For the recommended viscosity and qual- sound three times if the fob is removed from the ity grades, refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Tech- vehicle and the ignition state is in the “READY” nical Specifications”. mode. Please consider this feature when intention- ally standing the vehicle for extended periods of CAUTION! time over one hour. Torestart the vehicle, follow the normal process for starting your vehicle. Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Min- eral Oil in the engine or damage may result. ENGINE BREAK-IN NOTE: RECOMMENDATIONS A new engine may consume some oil during its first A long break-in period is not required for the engine few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your ve- should be considered a normal part of the break-in Electric Park Brake Switch hicle. and not interpreted as a problem. To engage the park brake manually, push the Elec- tric Park Brake Switch. 143 To release the park brake manually, the ignition • The park brake can be engaged even when the switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on ignition switch is OFF. However, it can only be WARNING! the brake pedal, then push the parking brake switch disengaged when the ignition switch is in the ON/ • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with down momentarily. RUN position. access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a • The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB The parking brake will disengage automatically number of reasons. A child or others could be switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in either when the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, seriously or fatally injured. Children should be the released or applied position. The light will the transmission is in DRIVE or REVERSE, the warned not to touch the parking brake, brake extinguish upon releasing the switch. driver seat belt is buckled, and an attempt is made pedal or the transmission gear selector. to drive away by pressing the accelerator pedal. • Refer to “Parking Brake” in “Starting And Operat- • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, ing” located in your Owner’s Manual at (or in a location accessible to children), and do NOTE: www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/ • You may hear a slight whirring sound from the (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Cana- RUN mode. A child could operate power win- back of the vehicle while the parking brake en- dian Residents) for further information. dows, other controls, or move the vehicle. gages or disengages. • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to • Once the parking brake is fully engaged, the WARNING! brake failure and a collision. BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster • Always fully apply the parking brake when leav- STARTING AND OPERATING and the LED indicator on the switch will illuminate. • Never use the PARK position as a substitute ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage Once the park brake is fully disengaged, the for the parking brake. Always apply the park- or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster ing brake fully when exiting the vehicle to in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to and the LED indicator on the switch will extin- guard against vehicle movement and possible roll and cause damage or injury. guish. injury or damage. • When exiting the vehicle, always make sure • Driving the vehicle with the parking brake en- • If your foot is on the brake pedal while you are the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the gaged, or repeated use of the parking brake to engaging or disengaging the parking brake, you key fob from the vehicle, and lock your ve- slow the vehicle may cause serious damage to may notice a small amount of brake pedal move- hicle. the brake system. ment.

144 CAUTION! AUTOMATIC WARNING! TRANSMISSION If the Brake System Warning Light remains on • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEU- with the parking brake released, a brake system TRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system WARNING! speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate • Never use the PARK position as a substitute quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose for the park brake. Always apply the park brake SafeHold control of the vehicle and hit someone or fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against something. Only shift into gear when the en- SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park vehicle movement and possible injury or dam- gine is idling normally (or stopped) and your Brake System that will engage the park brake auto- age. foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. matically if the vehicle is left unsecured. If the auto- • Your vehicle could move and injure you and • Unintended movement of a vehicle could in- matic transmission is not in PARK, the seat belt is others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to jure those in or near the vehicle. As with all unbuckled, the driver door is open, the vehicle is at move the transmission gear selector out of vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while a standstill, and there is no attempt to depress the PARK with the brake pedal released. Make the engine is running or the propulsion system brake pedal or accelerator pedal, the park brake will sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting is active. Before exiting a vehicle, always come automatically engage to prevent the vehicle from the vehicle. to a complete stop, then apply the park brake, • The transmission may not engage PARK if the rolling. shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, the Electric Park Brake Switch while the driver door verify that the transmission gear position indi- securing the vehicle against unwanted move- is open and brake pedal is pressed. Once manually cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blink- ment. bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled again once the ing. Ensure that the vehicle is completely • When leaving the vehicle, always make sure vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is stopped, and the PARK position is properly the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the cycled to the OFF position and back to ON again. indicated, before exiting the vehicle. key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.

145 Hybrid Transmission Toselect a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector. WARNING! • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with The transmission is controlled using a rotary elec- NOTE: access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil- tronic gear selector located on the center console. Youmust press the brake pedal to shift the transmis- dren to be in a vehicle unattended is danger- The transmission gear range (PRNDL) is displayed sion out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when stopped or ous for a number of reasons. A child or others both above the gear selector and in the instrument moving at low speeds). cluster display. could be seriously or fatally injured. Children Push down on the gear selector and then rotate to should be warned not to touch the park brake, access the L position. brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle Select the DRIVE range for normal driving. (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING

Transmission Gear Selector

146 SPEED CONTROL NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed When engaged, the Speed Control takes over ac- Control System has been designed to shut down if celerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph multiple Speed Control functions are operated at (40 km/h). the same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Speed The Speed Control buttons are located on the right Control on/off button and resetting the desired side of the steering wheel. vehicle set speed.

WARNING! Speed Control can be dangerous where the sys- tem cannot maintain a constant speed. Yourve- hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do Speed Control Switches not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on 1 — Push Cancel roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slip- 2 — Push Set+/Accel pery. 3 — Push Resume 4 — Push On/Off 5 — Push Set-/Decel

147 ToActivate When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. will continue to increase until the button is re- Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Con- Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate leased, then the new set speed will be established. trol. The cruise indicator light in the instrument at the selected speed. cluster display will illuminate. Toturn the system off, ToDecrease Speed push the on/off button a second time. The cruise ToVary The Speed Setting When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease indicator light will turn off. The system should be ToIncrease Speed speed by pushing the SET (-) button. turned off when not in use. The driver’s preferred units can be selected through When the Speed Control is set, you can increase the Uconnect system if equipped. The speed incre- speed by pushing the SET (+) button. WARNING! ment shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit Leaving the Speed Control system on when not The driver’s preferred units can be selected through of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): the Uconnect system if equipped. The speed incre- in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set U.S. Speed (mph) the system or cause it to go faster than you want. ment shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit You could lose control and have an accident. of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a Always leave the system off when you are not 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap U.S. Speed (mph) using it. of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph. • Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed STARTING AND OPERATING ToSet A Desired Speed 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap will continue to decrease until the button is re- of the button results in an increase of 1 mph. leased, then the new set speed will be established. Turn the Speed Control on. • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed Metric Speed (km/h) NOTE: will continue to increase until the button is re- • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed leased, then the new set speed will be established. 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or Metric Speed (km/h) of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. SET (-) button. • Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap will continue to decrease until the button is re- of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h. leased, then the new set speed will be established. 148 ToAccelerate For Passing ADAPTIVE CRUISE If your vehicle is equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control, you have three additional buttons that are Press the accelerator as you would normally. When CONTROL (ACC) used to turn ACC on/off as well as set a specified the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set distance you would like to maintain between you speed. and the vehicle in front of you. ToResume Speed If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will To resume a previously set speed, push the RES apply limited braking or acceleration automatically button and release. Resume can be used at any to maintain a preset following distance, while speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). matching the speed of the vehicle ahead. ToDeactivate If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed and behave A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC similarly to the Speed Control function. (cancel) button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the speed control ACC On/Off without erasing the set speed from memory. • Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control Pushing the on/off button or cycling the ignition to (ACC) on/off button. “ACC READY” will appear OFF, erases the set speed from memory. in the instrument cluster display to indicate the Adaptive Cruise Switches ACC is on. • Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control 1 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off (ACC) on/off button a second time to turn the 2 — Distance Setting – Decrease system off. “ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL 3 — Distance Setting – Increase (ACC) OFF” will appear in the instrument cluster display to indicate the ACC is off.

149 ToSet A Desired ACC Speed ToVary The Speed Setting Metric Speed (km/h) When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push ToIncrease Speed • Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by release. The instrument cluster display will show the of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h. pushing the SET (+) button. set speed. • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed The driver's preferred units can be selected through If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below will continue to increase in 10 km/h increments the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted until the button is released. The increase in set “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Own- to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is set when the speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. er’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or ToDecrease Speed speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle. www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for While ACC is set, the can be decreased by pushing NOTE: further information.. The speed increment shown is the SET (-) button. ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric front of your vehicle in close proximity. (km/h) units: The driver's preferred units can be selected through Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal, after U.S. Speed (mph) the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Own- the ACC has been set. If you do not, the vehicle • Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a er’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ STARTING AND OPERATING may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or this occurs: of the button results in an increase of 1 mph. www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for • The message “ACC DRIVER OVERRIDE” will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed further information. The speed increment shown is display in the instrument cluster display. will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric • The system will not be controlling the distance the button is released. The increase in set speed is (km/h) units: between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The reflected in the instrument cluster display. vehicle speed will only be determined by the po- U.S. Speed (mph) sition of the accelerator pedal. • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph. 150 • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed • The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full ToResume will continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements stop when following a target vehicle. If an ACC If there is a set speed in memory push the RES until the button is released. The decrease in set host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a standstill, speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. after two seconds the driver will either have to (resume) button and then remove your foot from push the RES (resume) button, or apply the accel- the accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster dis- Metric Speed (km/h) erator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing play will display the last set speed. set speed. • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a NOTE: 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap • The ACC system maintains set speed when driv- of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. ing up hill and down hill. However, a slight speed • If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two change on moderate hills are normal. In addition, seconds, then the driver will either have to push • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator will continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements descending downhill. This is normal operation and pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set until the button is released. The decrease in set necessary to maintain set speed. When driving up speed. speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. hill and down hill, the ACC system will cancel if the • ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary NOTE: braking temperature exceeds normal range vehicle in-front of your vehicle in close proximity. (overheated). • When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed will be the ToAccelerate For Passing WARNING! current speed of the vehicle. Press the accelerator as you would normally. When The Resume function should only be used if • When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a the powertrain braking power does not slow the speed. set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the traffic and road conditions could cause the ve- brake system will automatically slow the vehicle. hicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.

151 ToTurn Off ACC Operation At Stop Changing Modes (ACC Only) The system will turn off and clear the set speed in If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill If desired, the Adaptive Cruise Control mode can memory if: while following a target vehicle, and the target ve- be turned off and the system can be operated as a hicle starts moving within two seconds of your ve- • The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off but- Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode. While hicle coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume ton is pushed. in the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode, motion without the need for any driver action. the distance setting feature will be disabled and the • The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off If the target vehicle does not start moving within system will maintain the speed you set. button is pushed. two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, • To change between the different cruise control • The ignition is turned OFF. the driver will either have to push the RES (resume) modes, push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage on/off button which turns the ACC off. Distance Setting (ACC Only) the ACC. The vehicle will accelerate to the existing • Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Con- The specified following distance for ACC can be set speed. trol on/off button will result in turning on (chang- set by varying the distance setting between four NOTE: ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (me- After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a stand- mode. dium) and one bar (short). Using this distance set- still for approximately three consecutive minutes, ting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC NOTE: STARTING AND OPERATING the distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance system will be cancelled. Youwill need to reset the speed at this point, as the setting displays in the instrument cluster display. system will not save the previously set speed when While the ACC system is holding your vehicle at a • Toincrease the distance setting, push the Distance changing between the speed control systems. standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the Setting—Increase button and release. Each time driver door is opened, the parking brake will be Refer to your Owner's Manual at www.mopar.com/ the button is pushed, the distance setting in- activated, and the ACC system will be cancelled. creases by one bar (longer). en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for • To decrease the distance setting, push the Dis- further information. tance Setting—Decrease button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter). 152 WARNING! WARNING! WARNING! Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve- tion. If the target vehicle does not start moving Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode will nience system. It is not a substitute for active within 3 minutes the parking brake will be ac- not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware driving involvement. It is always the driver’s re- tivated, and the ACC system will be cancelled. of the mode selected. sponsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and You should switch off the ACC system: You can change the mode by using the Cruise weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to • When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, Control buttons. The two control modes func- the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situa- tion differently. Always confirm which mode is operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle tions (i.e., in highway construction zones). selected. under all road conditions. Your complete atten- • When entering a turn lane or highway off tion is always required while driving to maintain ramp; when driving on roads that are winding, General Information icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep up- safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio hill or downhill slopes. these warnings can result in a collision and death Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: or serious personal injury. • When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes. The ACC system: • When circumstances do not allow safe driving This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules • Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming ve- at a constant speed. and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS stan- hicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped The Cruise Control system has two control dard(s). Operation is subject to the following two vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). modes: conditions: • Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi- • Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintain- 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. tions into account, and may be limited upon ing an appropriate distance between vehicles. adverse sight distance conditions. • Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode 2. This device must accept any interference re- • Does not always fully recognize complex driv- for cruising at a constant preset speed. For ceived, including interference that may cause ing conditions, which can result in wrong or additional information, refer to “Normal undesired operation. missing distance warnings. (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” section • Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while in the Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/ NOTE: following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) Changes or modifications not expressly approved for approximately 3 minutes in the stop posi- or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents). by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 153 PARKSENSE REAR PARK • The automatic braking function may not provide • The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding acceleration and braking and is responsible for the ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED with a detected obstacle depending on vehicle vehicle's movements. The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides speed, road conditions, and brake capability. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” for visual and audible indications of the distance be- • The automatic braking function may not be ap- limitations of this system and recommendations. tween the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when plied fast enough for moving obstacles that ap- ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled backing up, e.g. during a parking maneuver. If your proach the rear of the vehicle from the left and / or or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmis- right sides. ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position. sion, the vehicle brakes may be automatically ap- • The automatic braking function can be enabled/ ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector plied and released when performing a reverse park- disabled from the Customer-Programmable Fea- is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear ing maneuver if the system detects a possible tures section of the Uconnect System. collision with an obstacle. selector position, the system will remain active until • ParkSense will retain its last known configuration the vehicle speed is increased to approximately NOTE: state for the automatic braking function through 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and • The driver can override the automatic braking ignition cycles. above the system's operating speed, a warning will appear within the instrument cluster display indicat- function by pushing the gas pedal, turning The automatic braking function is intended to assist ing the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will ParkSense off via ParkSense switch, or changing STARTING AND OPERATING the driver in avoiding possible collisions with de- become active again if the vehicle speed is de- the gear while the automatic brakes are being tected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE creased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph applied. gear. (9 km/h). • Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not NOTE: available. • The driver is always responsible for controlling the • Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a vehicle. faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park Assist system or the Braking System Module. • The system is provided to assist the driver and not to substitute the driver.

154 ParkSense Sensors Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s system, the instrument cluster will display the The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for in “Getting ToKnow YourInstrument Panel” in your (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear further information. Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depend- Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ing on the location, type and orientation of the www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for obstacle. ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the further information.. When the gear selector is ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the ParkSense Visual Alert the Uconnect display. instrument cluster display will show the The ParkSense Warning screen will only be dis- “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the played if Sound and Display is selected from the vehicle is in REVERSE. Customer - Programmable Features section of the The ParkSense switch LED will be on when Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual at ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system is www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Cana- dian Residents) for further information. requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on. The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warn- NOTE: ings to indicate the distance between the rear When KeySense feature is present, the ParkSense fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. System will reject customer input to turn the system off via the hard switch. The instrument cluster dis- play will show "KeySense in Use Selected Feature ParkSense Switch Cannot be Disabled" message.

155 Service The ParkSense Rear Park If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR • When you move the gear selector to the RE- Assist System SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster dis- VERSE position and ParkSense is turned off, the play make sure the outer surface and the underside instrument cluster display will show “PARKSENSE During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in Park Assist System has detected a faulted condi- ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle REVERSE. tion, the instrument cluster will actuate a single the ignition. If the message continues to appear, see chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the • ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR an authorized dealer. radio when it is sounding a tone. SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE- • Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Refer to “Instru- QUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster display, not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your see an authorized dealer. not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual at debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html ParkSense System Usage Precautions working properly. The ParkSense system might (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Cana- NOTE: not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, dian Residents) for further information. When the or it could provide a false indication that an ob- gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system • Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, stacle is behind the fascia/bumper. has detected a faulted condition, the instrument mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system cluster display will show the "PARKSENSE UN- operating properly. • ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is STARTING AND OPERATING AVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or in the open position. • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE- could affect the performance of ParkSense. • Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense QUIRED" message for five seconds while the ve- system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, hicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, • When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument clus- trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches ParkSense will not operate and will read “OFF” over ter will display “PARKSENSE OFF”. Furthermore, (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do the arcs. once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until so can result in the system misinterpreting a close you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition. object as a sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE- QUIRED” message to be displayed in the instru- ment cluster display. 156 be automatically applied and released when per- WARNING! CAUTION! forming a reverse parking maneuver if the system • Drivers must be careful when backing up even • ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable detects a possible collision with an obstacle. when using ParkSense. Always check carefully to recognize every obstacle, including small NOTE: behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other detected or not detected at all. Obstacles lo- • The driver can override the automatic braking vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before cated above or below the sensors will not be function by pushing the gas pedal, turning backing up. Youare responsible for safety and detected when they are in close proximity. ParkSense off via ParkSense switch, or changing must continue to pay attention to your sur- • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the gear while the automatic brakes are being roundings. Failure to do so can result in serious ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time applied. injury or death. when an obstacle is detected. It is recom- • Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not • Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom- mended that the driver looks over his/her available. mended that the ball mount and hitch ball shoulder when using ParkSense. assembly is disconnected from the vehicle • Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure faulted condition detected with the ParkSense to do so can result in injury or damage to PARKSENSE FRONT AND Park Assist system or the Braking System Module. vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will REAR PARK ASSIST — • The automatic braking function may not provide be much closer to the obstacle than the rear IF EQUIPPED enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con- with a detected obstacle depending on vehicle tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual speed, road conditions, and brake capability. the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, de- and audible indications of the distance between the • The automatic braking function may not be ap- pending on its size and shape, giving a false rear and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle plied fast enough for moving obstacles that ap- indication that an obstacle is behind the ve- when backing up or moving forward, e.g. during a proach the rear of the vehicle from the left and / or hicle. parking maneuver. If your vehicle is equipped with right sides. an Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes may • The automatic braking function can be enabled/ disabled from the Customer-Programmable Fea- tures section of the Uconnect System. 157 • ParkSense will retain its last known configuration approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 in (120 cm) from the front state for the automatic braking function through REVERSE and above the system's operating fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depend- ignition cycles. speed, a warning will appear in the instrument clus- ing on the location, type and orientation of the ter display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. obstacle. The automatic braking function is intended to assist The system will become active again if the vehicle the driver in avoiding possible collisions with de- ParkSense Visual Alert speed is decreased to speeds less than approxi- tected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE mately 6 mph (9 km/h). The ParkSense Warning screen will only be dis- gear. played if Sound and Display is selected from the ParkSense Sensors NOTE: Customer - Programmable Features section of the • The driver is always responsible for controlling the The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings” in vehicle. fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual at that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html • The system is provided to assist the driver and not can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Cana- to substitute the driver. (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from the rear fascia/ dian Residents) for further information.. • The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the acceleration and braking and is responsible for the the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. vehicle's movements. instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings

STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/ Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” for If your vehicle is equipped with the ParkSense Ac- bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected limitations of this system and recommendations. tive Park Assist system, six sensors will be located in obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled the rear fascia/bumper. Refer to the "ParkSense “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” on your or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the Active Park Assist System" section for further infor- Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position. mation. owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the ve- further information.. one of these gear selector positions, the system will hicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 158 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for ABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or the further information.. When the gear selector is "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE- ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the QUIRED" message for five seconds. When the gear ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below instrument cluster display will show the selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has the Uconnect display. “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster vehicle is in REVERSE. display will show a "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAIL- The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" pop up ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system is message for five seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and graphic will be displayed with "OFF" at either the front requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink or rear sensor location depending on where the fault is momentarily, and then the LED will be on. detected. The system will continue to provide arc alerts NOTE: for the side that is functioning properly.These arc alerts When KeySense feature is present, the ParkSense will interrupt the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE System will reject customer input to turn the system WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAIL- off via the hard switch. The instrument cluster dis- ABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE play will show "KeySense in Use Selected Feature UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if Cannot be Disabled" message. an object is detected within the five second pop-up ParkSense Switch duration. The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for Service The ParkSense Park Assist as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the System system, the instrument cluster will display the Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ in “Getting ToKnow YourInstrument Panel” in your will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ it will display the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAIL- further information. 159 If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR • When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE • There may be a delay in the object detection rate SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument if the object is moving. This may cause the auto- WIPE FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instru- cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for five sec- matic braking application to be delayed. ment cluster display make sure the outer surface onds while the vehicle is in REVERSE. and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or • ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the WARNING! front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, radio when it is sounding a tone. mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the • Drivers must be careful when backing up even • Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care ignition. If the message continues to appear see an when using ParkSense. Always check carefully not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must authorized dealer. behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument working properly. The ParkSense system might backing up. Youare responsible for safety and cluster display, see an authorized dealer. not detect an obstacle behind or in front of the must continue to pay attention to your sur- appropriate fascia/bumper, or it could provide a roundings. Failure to do so can result in serious ParkSense System Usage Precautions false indication that an obstacle is behind or in injury or death. NOTE: front of the appropriate fascia/bumper. • Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom- mended that the ball mount and hitch ball as- • Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of • Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense

STARTING AND OPERATING sembly is disconnected from the vehicle when system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) ParkSense system operating properly. so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can obstacles because the hitch ball will be much • Construction equipment, large trucks, and other result in the system misinterpreting a close object closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when vibrations could affect the performance of as a sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. ParkSense. UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” mes- Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount sage to be displayed in the instrument cluster. • When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument clus- and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size ter will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, • ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is and shape, giving a false indication that an ob- once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you in the open position. stacle is behind the vehicle. turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key. 160 parallel or a perpendicular parking space on either side Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active CAUTION! (i.e., driver side or passenger side). Park Assist System • ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable NOTE: The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be to recognize every obstacle, including small • The driver is always responsible for controlling the enabled and disabled with the ParkSense Active obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, Park Assist switch, located on the switch panel be- detected or not detected at all. Obstacles lo- and must intervene as required. low the Uconnect display. cated above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity. • The system is provided to assist the driver and not • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using to substitute the driver. ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time • During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver when an obstacle is detected. It is recom- touches the steering wheel after being instructed mended that the driver looks over his/her to remove their hands from the steering wheel, the shoulder when using ParkSense. system will cancel, and the driver will be required to manually complete the parking maneuver. PARKSENSE ACTIVE • The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. envi- PARK ASSIST SYSTEM ronmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a parking space that has surfaces that The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves). to assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular • New vehicles from the dealership must have at parking maneuvers by identifying a proper parking least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the space, providing audible/visual instructions, and con- ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully cali- ParkSense Active Park Assist Switch trolling the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park brated and performs accurately. This is due to the Location Assist system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to improve driver maintains control of the accelerator, gear selec- the performance of the feature. The system will Toenable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, tor and brakes. Depending on the driver's parking also continuously perform the dynamic vehicle push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once maneuver selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist calibration to account for differences such as over (LED turns on). system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a or under inflated tires and new tires. 161 Todisable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a Turning LaneSense On Or Off push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch again haptic warning in the form of torque applied to the The LaneSense button is located on the switch (LED turns off). steering wheel to prompt the driver to remain within panel below the Uconnect display. When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is the lane boundaries. The LaneSense system will enabled the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push also provide a visual warning through the instru- OK to Switch to Perpendicular” message will ap- ment cluster display to prompt the driver to remain pear in the instrument cluster display. You may within the lane boundaries. switch to perpendicular parking if you desire. Push The driver may manually override the haptic warn- the OK button on the left side steering wheel switch ing by applying torque into the steering wheel at to change your parking space setting. You may any time. switch back to parallel parking if you desire. When only a single lane marking is detected and the Refer to your Owner's Manual at driver unintentionally drifts across that lane marking www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system pro- (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for further information. vides a visual warning through the instrument clus- ter display to prompt the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking is detected, a

STARTING AND OPERATING LANESENSE haptic (torque) warning will not be provided. LaneSense Button LaneSense Operation NOTE: To turn the LaneSense system on, push the Lane- The LaneSense system is operational at speeds When operating conditions have been met, the Sense button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense On” above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 105 mph LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands message is shown in the instrument cluster display. (169 km/h). It uses a forward looking camera to are on the steering wheel and provides an audible detect lane markings and measure vehicle position and visual warning to the driver when the driver’s To turn the LaneSense system off, push the Lane- within the lane boundaries. hands are not detected on the steering wheel. The Sense button again (LED turns on). When both lane markings are detected and the system will cancel if the driver does not return their driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn hands to the wheel. 162 NOTE: yellow (on/off), while the outside lane line on the • When the LaneSense system senses the lane has The LaneSense system will retain the last system left of the display will remain solid yellow. The been approached and is in a lane departure situa- state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the LaneSense telltale changes from solid white tion, the left inside lane line flashes yellow (on/off) ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position. to flashing yellow. while the left outside line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes from solid yellow LaneSense Warning Message NOTE: to flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to The LaneSense system operates with the similar The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the behavior for a right lane departure when only the drift condition through the instrument cluster dis- lane boundary. right lane marking has been detected. play. For example: If approaching the left side of the lane Left Lane Departure — Instrument Cluster Display the steering wheel will turn to the right. Both Lane Lines Detected NOTE: When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines • When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines The LaneSense system operates with the similar are gray when both of the lane boundaries have not turn from gray to white. The LaneSense telltale behavior for a right lane departure. been detected and the LaneSense telltale is is solid green when both lane markings have solid white. been detected and the system is “armed” to pro- Changing LaneSense Status Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected vide visual warnings in the instrument cluster dis- play and a torque warning in the steering wheel if The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the • When the LaneSense system is ON, the Lane- an unintentional lane departure occurs. intensity of the torque warning and the warning Sense Telltale is solid white when only the left zone sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late) that you can • When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift lane marking has been detected and the system is configure through the Uconnect system screen. Re- situation, the left inside and outside lane lines turn ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument fer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes cluster display if an unintentional lane departure Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ occurs on the left side. from solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or • When the LaneSense system senses the lane has direction of the lane boundary. www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for been approached and is in a lane departure situa- further information. tion, the visual warning in the instrument cluster For example: If approaching the left side of the lane display will show the left inside lane line flashing the steering wheel will turn to the right. 163 NOTE: NOTE: When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on • When enabled the system operates above 37 mph The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program- the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and (60 km/h) and below 105 mph (169 km/h). mable modes of operation that may be selected its projected backup path based on the steering through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect wheel position. • Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings. Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual at Different colored zones indicate the distance to the • The system will not apply torque to the steering www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html rear of the vehicle. wheel whenever a safety system engages. (anti- (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Cana- lock brakes, traction control system, electronic sta- dian Residents) for further information. NOTE: bility control, forward collision warning, etc.). If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. PARKVIEW REAR BACK exited and the navigation or audio screen appears UP CAMERA — again. WARNING! IF EQUIPPED When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the camera image will Drivers must be careful when backing up even Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds after when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and STARTING AND OPERATING on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into RE- vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF posi- VERSE. The image will be displayed on the touch- backing up. Youare responsible for the safety of tion. screen display along with a caution note “Check your surroundings and must continue to pay Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen. A touch screen button to disable display of the attention while backing up. Failure to do so can After five seconds, this note will disappear. The camera image is made available when the vehicle is result in serious injury or death. ParkView Rear Back Up Camera is located on the not in REVERSE gear. Display of the camera image rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate. after shifting out of REVERSE can be disabled via a touch screen button personalization entry in the camera settings menu. 164 onds, this note will disappear. The Surround View When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with CAUTION! Camera System is comprised of four sequential camera delay turned off), the surround view camera • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should cameras located in the front grille, rear liftgate and mode is exited and the last known screen appears only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView side mirrors. again. camera is unable to view every obstacle or NOTE: When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on object in your drive path. The Surround View Camera System has program- the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle, • Toavoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be mable settings that may be selected through the including the side view mirrors and its projected driven slowly when using ParkView to be able Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in backup path based on the steering wheel position. to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual at recommended that the driver look frequently Different colored zones indicate the distance to the over his/her shoulder when using ParkView. www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html rear of the vehicle. (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Cana- dian Residents) for further information. Modes Of Operation SURROUND VIEW When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the rear Additional camera modes can be selected when the CAMERA SYSTEM — camera view and top view is the default view of the vehicle is in any gear and the surround view camera IF EQUIPPED system. system is activated by pressing the soft key located in the “Controls” screen or the “Apps” screen in the Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Uconnect system. View Camera System that allows you to see an camera delay turned on), the camera image will on-screen image of the surroundings and top view continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds after TopView of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed The Topview will show in the Uconnect System with into REVERSE or a different view is selected exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into Rear View and Front View in a split view display. through the "on screen soft buttons". The top view PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF posi- There is integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at of the vehicle will show which doors are open. The tion. There is a touch screen button (X) to disable the front and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will image will be displayed on the touchscreen display the display of the camera image. change color from yellow to red corresponding the along with a caution note “Check Entire Surround- distance zones to the oncoming object. ings” across the top of the screen. After five sec- 165 NOTE: Front Cross Path View NOTE: • Front tires will be in image when the tires are Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key will give the • If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds turned. driver a wider angle view of the front camera sys- up on the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse • Due to wide angle cameras in mirror, the image will tem. The Top view will be disabled when this is with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover appear distorted. selected. the lenses. • Topview will show which sliding doors are open. • If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see Deactivation your nearest authorized dealer. • Open front doors will remove outside image. The system can be deactivated in the following Rear View conditions: WARNING! This is the Default view of the system in REVERSE • The speed of the vehicle reaches greater than and is paired with a Top view of the vehicle with Drivers must be careful when backing up even 8 mph (13 km/h). active guide lines for the projected path when en- when using the Surround View Camera. Always abled. • The vehicle is out of REVERSE for greater than check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, Rear Cross Path View 10 seconds. obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key will give the • The vehicle shifted into PARK from a different You are responsible for the safety of your sur- driver a wider angle view of the rear camera system. gear. roundings and must continue to pay attention

STARTING AND OPERATING The Topview will be disabled when this is selected. • If the vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE, while backing up. Failure to do so can result in Front View press the “X” button. serious injury or death. The Front view will show you what is immediately in • The system is turned off manually through the front of the vehicle with guide lines for the pro- Uconnect settings menu. Refer to “Uconnect Set- jected path when enabled. tings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Cana- dian Residents) for further information.

166 2. The button press will initiate a sequence of CAUTION! REFUELING THE VEHICLE events to depressurize the fuel system. A mes- • To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View sage will display in the cluster letting you know should only be used as a parking aid. The 1. Press the fuel filler door release button (located when the vehicle is ready to be fueled. Surround View camera is unable to view every in the driver's door in the upper map pocket). obstacle or object in your drive path. • Toavoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using Surround View to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look fre- quently over his/her shoulder when using Sur- round View.

Instrument Cluster Message Fuel Filler Door Release Switch

167 NOTE: 3. Open the fuel filler door by pressing in the rear 4. There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors area of fuel door. inside the pipe seal the system. • After pushing the release button you will have 20 minutes to fuel the vehicle, beyond 5. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the 20 minutes you will need to press the release nozzle opens and holds both flapper doors while button again. refueling. • The fuel door could take up to 15 seconds to 6. Fill the vehicle with fuel, when the fuel nozzle open. It may take longer to open in some “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full. situations, such as high ambient tempera- tures. 7. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to allow fuel to drain from nozzle. • If you hear a hissing sound when the nozzle is inserted into the filler pipe, wait to begin fuel- 8. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door. ing the vehicle until after the hissing sound Emergency Gas Can Refueling stops. Most gas cans will not open the flapper door. A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow Fuel Filler Door emergency refueling with a gas can.

STARTING AND OPERATING 1. Retrieve funnel from the storage bin located in NOTE: the left rear quarter trim. In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly 2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup fuel nozzle, ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold and re-release the fuel door using the inside both flapper doors open. release button. Do not pry on the door. 3. Pour fuel into funnel opening. 4. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to putting back in the spare tire storage area.

168 Emergency Fuel Door Release 3. After removing green handle from retention WARNING! 1. Access the storage bin located behind the rear bracket, then pull the green handle directly away from the bracket to release the fuel door. • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near cargo trim panel. the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the 2. Remove access cover in the upper right corner. tank is being filled. • Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunc- tion Indicator Light” to turn on. • A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place fuel con- tainers on the ground while filling.

CAUTION! Toavoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. Fuel Door Emergency Release Access Cover Location 4. Re-install handle back into bracket when completed. 5. Wait 15 seconds and then begin fueling your vehicle.

169 Materials Added ToFuel When available, the usage of TopTier Detergent gaso- TRAILER TOWING line is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a Trailer towing is not permitted with this vehicle. Designated TOP TIER list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. Detergent Gasoline con- Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents tains a higher level of de- should be avoided. Many of these materials in- tergents to further aide in tended for gum and varnish removal may contain minimizing engine and fuel active solvents or similar ingredients. These can system deposits. harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) TowingThis Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle TowingCondition Wheel OFF The Ground All Models Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED Front OK Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED STARTING AND OPERATING On Trailer ALL OK

NOTE: • When towing your vehicle, always follow appli- • If your vehicle is disabled and in need of commer- cable state and provincial laws. Contact state and cial towing service, please refer to “TowingA Dis- • To avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engage- provincial Highway Safety offices for additional abled Vehicle” in “What ToDo In Emergencies” for ment, you must ensure that the Auto Park Brake details. further information. feature is disabled before towing this vehicle. The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect Settings. 170 Recreational Towing— All Models Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front 8. Press and hold the brake pedal. wheels are OFF the ground. This may be accom- DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the 9. Release the park brake. plished using a tow dolly (front wheels off the drivetrain will result. ground) or vehicle trailer (all four wheels off the 10. Turn the ignition OFF. ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure: CAUTION! 11. Release the brake pedal. 1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, fol- • DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the lowing the dolly manufacturer's instructions. drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires 2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly. towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground. 3. Apply the park brake. • Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, 4. Place the transmission in PARK. and remains released, while being towed. • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above 5. Turn the ignition OFF. requirements can cause severe transmission 6. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, damage. Damage from improper towing is not following the dolly manufacturer's instructions. covered under the New Vehicle Limited War- ranty. 7. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not start the vehicle.

171 172 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . .174 Preparations For Jacking ...... 182 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY .....194 Control...... 174 Jacking Instructions ...... 183 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . .194 Road Tire Installation ...... 185 BULB REPLACEMENT ...... 174 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .....194 Replacement Bulbs ...... 174 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ...... 186 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . .196 FUSES...... 176 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE Underhood Fuses ...... 176 JUMPSTARTING...... 191 Preparations For Jump Start...... 192 SYSTEM (EARS) ...... 198 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . .182 Jump Starting Procedure ...... 193 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR). . .198

173 HAZARD WARNING Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to oper- FLASHERS turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming ate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. Control traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. NOTE: The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers switch bank just above the climate controls. This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it may discharge the battery. when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. BULB REPLACEMENT Replacement Bulbs

Interior Bulbs Lamps Bulb Number

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Center & Rear Dome Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) Center & Rear Reading Lamps LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) Front Door Courtesy Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) Front Header Reading Lamps – If Equipped LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) Instrument Cluster Lamps LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) Liftgate Lamp(s) LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) Overhead Console Reading Lamps LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) Removable Console Lamp – If Equipped LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) Visor Vanity Lamps 6501966

174 Exterior Bulbs Lamps Bulb Number Projector Halogen Low Beam - 9005HL+ Halogen Headlamp High Beams - 9005LL Dedicated Daytime Running Lamp (If Equipped) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) Front Turn Signal Lamp PWY24WNA Side Marker Lamp W3W Front Park Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) Front Fog Lamp H11LL LED Front Fog Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) Center High Mounted Stop (CHMSL) Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) Stop/Turn Signal Lamp W21/5WLL Rear Tail- Body Side - LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) Rear Tail/SideMarker Lamp Rear Tail- Liftgate - LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) Rear Side Marker: W3W Backup Lamp W21W License Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)

175 FUSES Underhood Fuses Remove the cover by unlatching the two locks lo- cated at each side of the PDC cover, avoid the The Power Distribution Center is located in the usage of screw drivers or any other tool to remove engine compartment near the battery. This center WARNING! the cover, since they may apply excessive force and contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses, micro-fuses, result on a broken/damaged part. • When replacing a blown fuse, always use an circuit breakers and relays. A label that identifies appropriate replacement fuse with the same each component is printed on the inside of the After service is done, secure the cover with its two amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace cover. locks. a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or Before any procedure is done on the PDC, make any other material. Do not place a fuse inside sure engine is turned off. a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY switched off and/or disengaged. • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer. • If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, transmission system) or steering system blows, contact an autho- rized dealer.

176 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description F06 – 15 Amp Blue Low TempActive Pump F07 – 25 Amp Clear Ignition Coil/Fuel Injector F08 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier / ANC F09 – – Not Used F10 – 15 Amp Blue High TempAux Pump & HV Electric Coolant Htr Enable F11 – 15 Amp Blue ELCM / FTIV F12 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor (IBS) F13 – – Not Used F14A – Media Hub 1, 2, 3 10 Amp Red F14B – Pwr Lumbar Switch F15 40 Amp Green – CBC / Power Locks F16 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM F17 – – Not Used F18 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #4 (Exterior Lights #1) F19 – – Not Used F20 – 10 Amp Red Low TempPassive Pump F21 20 Amp Blue – PIM - Park PAWL Motor F22 – – Not Used F23 – – Not used F24 – 20 Amp Yellow RR Wiper F25A – Handsfree (Lt & Rt Rear Door Release Module) 10 Amp Red F25B – Active Grill Shutter F26 40 Amp Green – Front HVAC Blower Motor

177 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description F27 25 Amp Clear – RR Slide Door Module - RT F28A – Diagnostic Port 10 Amp Red F28B – USB + AUX (UCI) Port (IP) / Video USB Port F29 – – Not Used F30A – ECM / PIM 10 Amp Red F30B – Not Used F31 – 10 Amp Red 3, 4 way Valves F32 20 Amp Blue – ECM F33 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate Module F34 25 Amp Clear – Rear Door Control Module - Lt F35 25 Amp Clear – Sunroof Control Module F36 – – Not Used F37 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #4 (Exterior Lighting / PCM #2) IN CASE OF EMERGENCY F38 – – Not Used F39 25 Amp Clear – Rear HVAC Blower Motor F40 20 Amp Blue – Trans Oil Pump F41 – – Not Used F42 – – Not Used F43 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor F44 30 Amp Pink – CBC Feed #1 (Interior Lights) F45 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter F46 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module F47 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module

178 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description F48 40 Amp Green – EBCM Motor F49 25 Amp Clear – Rear Sliding Door Module - Lt F50 25 Amp Clear – Rear Door Control Module - Rt F51 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper F52 – – Not Used F53 – – Not Used F54 40 Amp Green – ESP-ECU And Valves F55A – RF Hub/KIN/ESL - BUX Only 15 Amp Blue F55B – DVD / VRM F56A – FRT. & RR HVAC CTRL/ OCM / ESL 10 Amp Red F56B – B. EPS / ESC - Electric Stability Ctr F57 – 20 Amp Yellow PIM - Main Power Supply F58 – – Not Used F59 – – Not Used F60 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Cargo APO F61 – – Not Used F62 – 20 Amp Yellow PIM-Main PWR Supply F63 – 5 Amp Tan HV Elect Coolant HTR Enable F64 – – Not Used F65 – – Not Used F66 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) / SGW F67 – 10 Amp Red HALF / PTS / Drivers Assist System Module (DASM) F68 – – Not Used

179 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description F69A – BPCM 15 Amp Blue F69B – BPCM (Redundant) F70 – 5 Amp Tan EAC F71 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn F72 – – Not Used F73 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL) F74 – – Not Used F75 – 5 Amp Tan Overhead Console / Rear ICS F76 – 20 Amp Yellow Uconnect / DCSD / Telematics Rear Entertainment / Media HUB / 3RD & 2ND Row USB CHRG / Vacuum F77A – Cleaner SW Backlight / 3RD Row Recliner SW Backlight / 2ND Row Stow N Go 10 Amp Red SW Backlight / LT&RT Sliding Door Backlight F77B – B. Sunroof / Rain sensor / Rear View Mirror / PIM

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY F78A – Transmission control Module (TCM) / E-Shifter 15 Amp Blue F78B – Instrument Cluster F79A – ICS / Frt & Rr HVAC / EPB Sw / SCCM 10 Amp Red F79B – Not Used F80 – 5 Amp Tan OBCM F81 – 5 Amp Tan APM F82 – – Not Used F83 30 Amp Pink – Trans Oil Pump 1 F84 – – Not Used F85 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter

180 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description F86 – – Not Used F87 – – Not Used F88 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats F89 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats F90 – 5 Amp Tan EBCM - ECU F91 – 15 Amp Blue Front Ventilated Seats/Heated Steering Wheel F92A – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway F92B – – Not Used F93 – – Not Used F94 40 Amp Green – ESC - Motor Pump F95A – USB Charge Only Port 10 Amp Red F95B – Selectable Fuse Location F96 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (Airbag) F97 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (Airbag) F98 – – Not Used F99 – – Not Used F100A – QVPM 10 Amp Red F100B – Rr Camera / LBSS / RBSS / CVPM / Humidity Snsr / In Car TempSnsr Circuit Breakers CB1 25 Amp Power Seat (Driver) CB2 25 Amp Power Seat (Pass)* CB3 – Not Used

* 30A mini fuse is substituted for 25A Circuit Breaker. 181 JACKING AND TIRE Preparations For Jacking CHANGING 1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas. NOTE: Yourvehicle is not equipped with a jack or spare tire. WARNING! This section describes wheel removal and installation. Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of WARNING! the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when • Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of operating the jack or changing the wheel. the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. being hit when operating the jack or changing 3. Apply the parking brake. the wheel. 4. Place the gear selector into PARK. • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. Wheels Blocked

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on 5. Place the ignition in OFF mode. NOTE: you. Youcould be crushed. Never put any part 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diago- Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If nally opposite of the jacking position. For ex- the vehicle is being jacked. you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it ample, if changing the right front tire, block the to a service center where it can be raised on a left rear wheel. lift. • The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

182 Jacking Instructions Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged. WARNING! Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. • Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. • Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. Jack Engagement Locations • Set the parking brake firmly and set the trans- mission in PARK. Warning Label • Do not let any passenger sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack. CAUTION! • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on take it to a service center where it can be raised locations other than those indicated in the Jack- on a lift. ing Instructions for this vehicle. • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. 1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely by turning them to the left one turn while the careful of motor traffic. wheel is still on the ground. 2. There are two jack engagement locations on Front Jacking Location Engaged each side of the vehicle body indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding. 183 3. Raise the jack until the jack head is properly engaged in the described location. Do not raise WARNING! the vehicle until you are sure the jack is se- To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the curely engaged. jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the 4. Raise the vehicle by using the jack. Raise the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface warning may result in serious injury. and enough clearance is obtained to remove the desired tire. Minimum tire lift provides maxi- mum stability.

Rear Jacking Location Engaged WARNING! Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can WARNING! make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle IN CASE OF EMERGENCY The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. only enough to remove the tire. You could be crushed. Never get any part of 5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a wheel covers, remove the cover from the wheel Installing Tire service center where it can be raised on a lift. by hand. Do not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub. CAUTION! 6. Install the wheel back onto the vehicle once CAUTION! Be sure to mount the tire with the valve stem ready. facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on if the inflatable spare tire is mounted incorrectly. locations other than those indicated.

184 7. Secure the wheel to the hub by tightening the Road Tire Installation nuts with wrench. Once the vehicle is lowered you will have a second opportunity to “torque” Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers the lug nuts. 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. 8. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the 2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels wrench while at the end of the handle for in- with wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the creased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star mounting studs which are on each side of the pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone Refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly Specifications” for proper wheel lug nut torque. tighten the lug nuts. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have Wheel Cover Installation them checked with a torque wrench by an autho- 1 — Valve Stem rized dealer or at a service station. 2 — Valve Notch 9. Lower the jack to its fully lowered position. 3 — Wheel Lug Nut 4 — Wheel Cover WARNING! 5 — Mounting Stud A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of 3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by spare tire in the places provided. Have the de- hand, snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. flated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immedi- Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install ately. the cover. 4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. 185 Vehicles Without Wheel Covers 5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque WARNING! with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the are properly seated against the wheel. jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the 2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly TIRE SERVICE KIT — tighten the lug nuts. warning may result in serious injury. IF EQUIPPED 5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the WARNING! jack handle counterclockwise. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the 6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the wrench while at the end of the handle for in- vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this creased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star warning may result in serious injury. pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical 3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the Specifications” for proper wheel lug nut torque. jack handle counterclockwise. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY If in doubt about the correct tightness, have 4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the them checked with a torque wrench by an autho- wrench while at the end of the handle for in- rized dealer or at a service station. creased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star Tire Service Kit Location 7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts Refer to “Torque Specifications” in the “Techni- Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service Kit. are properly seated against the wheel. cal Specifications” section for proper wheel lug Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread nut torque. If in doubt about the correct tight- can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects ness, have them checked with a torque wrench (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the by your authorized dealer or at a service station. tire. Tire Service Kit can be used in outside tempera- tures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will

186 provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your Selecting Sealant Mode vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to Tire Service Kit Storage inflate the tire. The Tire Service Kit is secured with a strap and is Using The Power Button stored in the storage bin located behind the rear Push and release the Power Button once to turn On cargo trim panel. the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation Button again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit. Using The Deflation Button Tire Service Kit (TopView) Push the Deflation Button to reduce the air pressure 1 — Power Plug in the tire if it becomes over-inflated. 2 — Mode Select Knob Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions 3 — Pressure Gauge 4 — Power Switch • Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to 5 — Deflation Button the expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealant Bottle Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Replacement” in this section. YourTire Service Kit is equipped with the following • The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and Tire Service Kit (Bottom View) symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode. needs to be replaced after each use. Always re- place these components immediately at your 1 — Sealant Bottle Selecting Air Mode original equipment vehicle dealer. 2 — Hose Attachments 3 — Sealant/Air Hose Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this position for air pump operation only.

187 • When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, clean water, and a damp cloth will remove WARNING! WARNING! Failure to follow these warnings can result in the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel • Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off passengers, and others around you. be peeled off and properly discarded. the road to avoid the danger of being hit when • Take care not to allow the contents of Tire • For optimum performance, make sure the valve using the Tire Service Kit. Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, stem on the wheel is free of debris before connect- • Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful ing the Tire Service Kit. under the following circumstances: if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the • If the puncture in the tire tread is approxi- • The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irrita- mately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter tion. Flush immediately with plenty of water if • If the tire has any sidewall damage. in the tread/contact surface of your vehicle’s tires. there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change • If the tire has any damage from driving clothing as soon as possible, if there is any • The Tire Service Kit Sealant is not intended to seal with extremely low tire pressure. contact with clothing. punctures on the tires' side walls. • If the tire has any damage from driving • Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains la- on a flat tire. • Youcan use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate tex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, IN CASE OF EMERGENCY • If the wheel has any damage. bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles, • If you are unsure of the condition of the consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire located in the Accessory Storage Compartment tire or the wheel. Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal- (on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport • Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use or heat source. water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce only the Air Pump and make sure the Mode Select • A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a vomiting! Consult a physician immediately. Knob is in the Air Mode when inflating such items collision or hard stop could endanger the oc- to avoid injecting sealant into them. cupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire • Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the Service Kit in the place provided. hoses.

188 Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit 4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob is in the the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode. Push Whenever YouStop ToUse Tire Service Kit: the Power Button to turn On the Tire Service Kit. 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehi- NOTE: 2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt cle’s Hazard Warning flashers. Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from the tire. power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the available. Make sure the vehicle is running before deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The turning ON the Tire Service Kit. ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose Deflated Tire: to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service 3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previ- 1. Always start the vehicle before turning ON the ous use. Call for assistance. Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best Tire Service Kit. positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the 2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the Sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump. Sealant Hose: Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve Mode position. 1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no stem in this position before proceeding. 3. After pushing the Power Button, the sealant longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle the (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle 70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the ignition in the OFF position. through the Sealant Hose and into the tire. Sealant Hose, the Pressure Gauge can read as 4. Apply the parking brake. NOTE: high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge will Setting Up ToUse Tire Service Kit: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi tire. (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the Sealant Bottle is empty. cap from the fitting at the end of the hose. If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire 2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next 0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose: immediately after the Sealant Bottle is empty. to the deflated tire. 1. Push the Power Button to turn Off the Tire Ser- Continue to operate the pump and inflate the vice Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the 3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then tire to the cold tire inflation pressure found on screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of onto the valve stem. debris. Reconnect the Sealant Hose to the valve 189 the tire and loading information label located in Drive Vehicle: 3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and then the driver-side door opening. Check the tire screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge. onto the valve stem. tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant 4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes: within the tire. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet. • The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to 5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting at the end drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. WARNING! of the hose onto the valve stem. If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. 6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to the Air or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced Mode position. 15 minutes: after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or NOTE: Pressure Gauge. replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla- in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the rec- If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar): passengers, and others around you. Have the tire ommended inflation pressure before continuing. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY checked as soon as possible at your authorized The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to 1. Push the Power Button to turn off the Tire Ser- dealer. drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. vice Kit. If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher: 2. Remove the speed limit label from the Tire Ser- After Driving: 1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire Service Kit vice Kit and place sticker on the steering wheel. Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You and inflate the tire to the cold tire inflation pres- 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from Stop ToUse Tire Service Kit” in this section before sure found on the tire and loading information the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at continuing. label located in the driver-side door opening. the end of the hose, and place the Tire Service 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the NOTE: Kit in the vehicle storage location. Proceed to cap from the fitting at the end of the hose. “Drive Vehicle.” If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla- 2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the rec- to the deflated tire. ommended inflation pressure before continuing. 190 2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve NOTE: • If the vehicle cannot be connected to a Level 1 or Level 2 charger where it is currently parked, the stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and • For sealant bottle installation, follow these steps unplug from 12 Volt outlet. reverse order. vehicle can be moved by connecting 12V power to the vehicle's "jump posts" and then shifting the 3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage Replacement sealant bottles are available at au- • transmission from PARK into NEUTRAL. Power thorized service centers. area in the vehicle. provided by the jumper cables will also allow the electric park brake to be released. Carefully move 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced JUMP STARTING at the earliest opportunity at an authorized the vehicle to a level 1 or Level 2 charge location. dealer or tire service center. The vehicle requires its 12V battery power to "turn- While the vehicle is being moved, the external 12V on" the vehicle's high voltage battery. The high power must remained connected to the vehicle 5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the steer- jump posts. ing wheel after the tire has been repaired. voltage battery is used to charge the 12V battery, provide electric vehicle operation, and to start the NOTE: 6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized vehicle's gas engine. If the 12V battery has been Be careful when moving the vehicle - ensure that dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Sealant discharged, the vehicle can be "jump started" using control of the vehicle is maintained. Also, ensure Bottle Replacement”. a set of jumper cables and a battery in another that vehicle is secured to prevent unintentional NOTE: vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. movement during and after moving the vehicle. If When having the tire serviced, advise the autho- If the vehicle's high voltage battery has also been the external 12V power becomes disconnected rized dealer or service center that the tire has been discharged, it will need to be recharged before the from the vehicle jump posts or there is an interrup- sealed using the Tire Service Kit. vehicle can be started: tion of the 12V power while moving the vehicle, the vehicle's transmission may engage PARK. Sealant Bottle Replacement: • If the vehicle can be connected to a Level 1 or When the vehicle is at the charging location, shift 1. Unwrap the power cord. Level 2 charger where it is currently parked, the vehicle will still require a "jump start" to allow the the transmission back to PARK, apply the electric 2. Unwrap the hose. vehicle to begin the battery charging process. park brake, and start the high voltage battery charg- 3. Remove the bottle cover. Once the vehicle charging has begun (indicated ing. Once the vehicle has been secured against by the charge status indicator on top the vehicle's unintentional movement and high voltage battery 4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release. instrument panel), the jumper cables can be re- charging has been initiated, the jumper cables can 5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor. moved from the vehicle jump posts. be removed from the vehicle jump posts. 191 Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so Preparations For Jump Start please follow the procedures in this section carefully. WARNING! • Remove any jewelry such as rings, watches NOTE: and bracelets that could make an inadvertent When using a portable battery booster pack, follow electrical contact. the manufacturer’s operating instructions and • Keep open flames or sparks away from the precautions. battery. Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen WARNING! gas which is flammable and explosive.

Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is 1. Apply the parking brake and place the ignition to frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause OFF. personal injury. NOTE: Positive Battery Post If the 12V Battery has been sufficiently dis- 1 — Negative Battery Post CAUTION! charged, this may not be possible. 2 — Positive Battery Post IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Do not use a portable battery booster pack or 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary any other booster source with a system voltage The remote battery posts in your vehicle is located electrical accessories. greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, on the left side of the engine compartment. 3. If using another vehicle to jump start the 12V alternator or electrical system may occur. WARNING! electrical system, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and Youcan be seriously injured or killed working on make sure the ignition is OFF. or around a motor vehicle: • Keep hands away from the radiator cooling WARNING! fan when the hood is raised. The fan starts Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this automatically and may start at any time, could establish a ground connection and per- whether the engine is running or not. sonal injury could result.

192 Jump Starting Procedure 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to the negative post near the wind- jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the WARNING! shield cowl (exposed metal post of the dis- booster battery. charged vehicle). 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper Failure to follow this jump starting procedure cable from the positive (+) post of the booster could result in personal injury or property dam- WARNING! battery. age due to battery explosion. Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the CAUTION! electrical spark could cause the battery to ex- vehicle with the discharged battery. Failure to follow these procedures could result in plode and could result in personal injury. Only If frequent jump-starting is required to start your damage to the charging system of the booster use the specific ground point, do not use any vehicle, you should have the battery and charging vehicle or the discharged vehicle. other exposed metal parts. system inspected at an authorized dealer. 5. Start the vehicle that has the booster battery, let Connecting The Jumper Cables the vehicle run a few minutes, and then cycle the CAUTION! 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable ignition to ON/RUN in the vehicle with the dis- Accessories plugged into the vehicle power out- to the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the charged battery. lets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even discharged battery. 6. Once the ignition is cycled to ON/RUN, select when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Even- 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) the gear that is needed for moving the vehicle. In tually, if plugged in long enough without engine jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the most instances of an emergency, this would be operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge booster battery. neutral. Once the proper gear is selected, re- sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or pre- move the jumper cables in the reverse sequence: vent the engine from starting. 3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster Disconnecting The Jumper Cables battery. 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from the ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery. 193 REFUELING IN NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an CAUTION! EMERGENCY impending overheat condition: Driving with a hot cooling system could damage The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, with the spare tire (if equipped) or in the upper A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling sys- pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle storage bin. If your vehicle is out of fuel and an tem and turning the A/C off can help remove this with the air conditioner turned off until the auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel into heat. pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the vehicle off the filler neck and proceed to fill the vehicle. • Youcan also turn the temperature control to maxi- immediately, and call for service. mum heat, the mode control to floor and the For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System blower control to high. This allows the heater core refer to “Refueling The Vehicle” in “Starting And to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in Operating ” in this manual. FREEING A STUCK removing heat from the engine cooling system. VEHICLE IF YOUR ENGINE WARNING! If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, OVERHEATS it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Youor others can be badly burned by hot engine the steering wheel right and left to clear the area In any of the following situations, you can reduce coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. around the front wheels. Then shift back and forth the potential for overheating by taking the appro- If you see or hear steam coming from under the between DRIVE and REVERSE while gently press- priate action. hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling ing the accelerator. On the highways — slow down. system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant NOTE: bottle is hot. Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than half a second, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.

194 Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spin- WARNING! CAUTION! ning the wheels or holding down the accelerator Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting pedal. generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin NOTE: damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or Push the "ESC Off" switch to place the Electronic tire could explode and injure someone. Do not drivetrain damage may result. Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial Off" spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph • Spinning the wheels too fast may lead to trans- mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Elec- (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continu- mission overheating and failure. It can also ously without stopping when you are stuck and tronic Brake Control System” in “Safety” in the damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/en-us/ above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no matter what the speed. care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or transmission shifting occurring). www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for • Allow the engine to idle with the transmission further information. Once the vehicle has been in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after freed, push the "ESC Off" switch again to restore every five rocking-motion cycles. This will "ESC On" mode. minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

195 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a dis- abled vehicle using a commercial towing service. TowingCondition Wheel OFF The Ground ALL MODELS Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED Front OK Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to NOTE: The manufacturer recommends towing your ve- hicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars • Youmust ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature flatbed. and other equipment designed for this purpose, is disabled before towing this vehicle (if rear following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. wheels are on the ground), to avoid inadvertent If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park must towed with the front wheels OFF the ground or other towing device to main structural members Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the cus- (using a towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brack- tomer programmable features in the Uconnect the front wheels raised). ets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under Settings. tow must be observed. NOTE: • Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electri- Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and cal failure when the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) is remains released, while being towed. engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels off the ground when moving the ve- hicle onto a flatbed.

196 If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, CAUTION! etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the Towing this vehicle in violation of the above ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode. requirements can cause severe engine and/or NOTE: transmission damage. Damage from improper The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Brake whenever the driver's door is opened (if the Limited Warranty. ignition is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and Vehicle Recovery Tow Points brake pedal is released). If you are towing this ve- hicle with the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery must manually disable the Electric Park Brake each Front Recovery Points Points that can be used to recover a disabled ve- time the driver's door is opened, by pressing the hicle, located on the underbody of the vehicle. brake pedal and then releasing the EPB. NOTE: CAUTION! Recovery feature: CAUTION! • Ensure that the towing service tow hooks are prop- • Is to be used by a professional ONLY. erly seated and secured in the attachment points. • Is used only to provide recovery of the • Do not use sling-type equipment when tow- • This recovery tow feature should be used by a vehicle. ing. Vehicle damage may occur. trained professional only. • Is NOT to be used to recover secondary • When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, vehicle. do not attach to front or rear suspension com- • Use approved receptacle location to free the dis- • Is NOT to be used for transporting the ponents. Damage to your vehicle may result abled vehicle from its environment. vehicle over the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”. from improper towing. Recovery load should: • Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, • Be applied at constant speed. and remains released, while being towed. • Be applied parallel to the center line of the length of the vehicle. • Not be an abrupt acceleration.

197 ENHANCED ACCIDENT EVENT DATA RECORDER RESPONSE SYSTEM (EDR) (EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re- This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Acci- corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to dent Response System. record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash or Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy- “Getting Started” for further information on the ment or hitting a road obstacle. Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function. Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Getting Started” for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR). IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

198 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEDSERVICING...... 200 TIRES ...... 205 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION Maintenance Plan ...... 200 Tire Safety Information ...... 205 UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle ...... 203 Tires — General Information ...... 214 GRADES ...... 222 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — Tire Types ...... 218 Treadwear ...... 222 HYBRID...... 204 Spare Tires — If Equipped ...... 219 Traction Grades ...... 222 Temperature Grades...... 223 RAISING THE VEHICLE...... 205 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ...... 220

199 SCHEDULED SERVICING Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change Severe Duty All Models indicator message after completing the scheduled Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is oper- change indicator system. The oil change indicator by someone other than your authorized dealer, the ated in a dusty and off road environment or is system will remind you that it is time to take your message can be reset by referring to “Vehicle Info” operated predominately at idle or only very low vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. in “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting ToKnow engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is consid- Based on engine operation conditions, the oil Your Instrument Panel” For further information, ered Severe Duty. refer to your Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/ change indicator message will illuminate. This Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: means that service is required for your vehicle. Op- en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or erating conditions such as frequent short-trips, or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents). • Check engine oil level. extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will NOTE: • Check windshield washer fluid level. influence when the “Oil Change Required” mes- Under no circumstances should oil change intervals • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or sage is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular cause the change oil message to illuminate as early 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally system turns on. your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the only a concern for fleet customers. • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and next 500 miles (805 km). brake master cylinder, fill as needed. NOTE: • Check function of all interior and exterior lights.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Even though the vehicle may not have been driven, Maintenance Plan both the fuel in the tank and oil in the engine will still degrade over time. Additionally, there will be a no- Required Maintenance Intervals tification to the driver if the engine is being run to Refer to the maintenance schedules on the follow- maintain the oil and fuel systems. ing page for the required maintenance intervals.

200 At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: • Change oil and filter • Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on • Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required • Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake • Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses • Inspect exhaust system • Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions

201 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 30,000 70,000 20,000 50,000 90,000 40,000 60,000 80,000 110,000 130,000 120,000 150,000 140,000 100,000 Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers: 32,000 96,000 64,000 48,000 80,000 112,000 176,000 192,000 128,000 144,000 224,000 160,000 240,000 208,000 Additional Inspections Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. X X X X X X X Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pulley, and replace if neces- X sary. Additional Maintenance Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X Replace spark plugs.(**) X Flush and replace the engine, power electronics, and battery coolant at XX 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km), whichever comes first.(***) Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE (**) The spark plug change interval is mileage (***) Some vehicles require special tools to add based only, yearly intervals do not apply. coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems prop- erly could lead to severe internal damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer.

202 Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle WARNING! Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or • Youcan be badly injured working on or around 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is oper- a motor vehicle. Do only service work for ated in a dusty and off road environment. This type which you have the knowledge and the right of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your ve- hicle to a competent mechanic. • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunc- tion and effect vehicle handling and perfor- mance. This could cause an accident.

203 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — HYBRID SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 1 — Battery Coolant Reservoir* 6 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 2 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Engine Air Cleaner 3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick 4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Power Electronics Coolant Reservoir* 5 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir * See your authorized dealer for service.

204 RAISING THE VEHICLE Tire Markings NOTE: • P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” go to an authorized dealer or service station. molded into the sidewall preceding the size desig- nation. Example: P215/65R15 95H. TIRES • European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro- Tire Safety Information pean design standards. Tires designed to this stan- dard have the tire size molded into the sidewall Tire safety information will cover aspects of the beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identifi- absent from this tire size designation. Example: cation Numbers, Tire Terminologyand Definitions, 215/65R15 96H. Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. Tire Markings • LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on 1—U.S.DOT 4 — Maximum Load U.S. design standards. The size designation for Safety Standards LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires Code (TIN) except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the 2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: Pressure LT235/85R16. 3 — Service 6 — Treadwear, • Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary Description Traction and emergency use only. Temporary high pressure Temperature compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” Grades molded into the sidewall preceding the size desig- nation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

205 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or "....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or TorS= Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) • Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code • "R" means radial construction, or • "D" means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

206 EXAMPLE: Service Description: 95 =LoadIndex • A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol • A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions • The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: • XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or • LL = Light load tire or • C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

207 Tire Identification Number (TIN) Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the not found on the outboard side, then you will find it tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, on the inboard side of the tire. including the date code, located on the white side- wall side of the tire.

EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation • This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) • 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) • 01 means the year 2001 • Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

208 Tire TerminologyAnd Definitions Term Definition B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Infla- tion pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

209 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door. Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the recommended pressure for your ve- hicle. Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the: 1. Number of people that can be carried in the Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) vehicle. 2. Totalweight your vehicle can carry. 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE and spare tires.

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

210 Loading Steps For Determining Correct Load (5) Determine the combined weight of lug- The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not Limit— gage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your (1) Locate the statement “The combined vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying available cargo and luggage load capacity weight of occupants and cargo should never capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire calculated in Step 4. size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehi- the Tire and Loading Information placard in “Ve- cle's placard. (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, hicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sec- load from your trailer will be transferred to tion of this manual. (2) Determine the combined weight of the your vehicle. Consult this manual to deter- driver and passengers that will be riding in mine how this reduces the available cargo NOTE: your vehicle. Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear (3) Subtract the combined weight of the axles must not be exceeded. driver and passengers from XXX kg or To determine the maximum loading conditions of XXX lbs. your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed (4) The resulting figure equals the available XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. Information placard. The combined weight of oc- For example, if “XXX” amount equals cupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb pas- (if applicable) should never exceed the weight ref- sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail- erenced here. able cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)

211 Metric Example For Load Limit NOTE: • For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and • Trailer towing is not permitted with this vehicle. lbs (392 kg). there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, • The following table shows examples on how to the amount of available cargo and luggage load calculate total load and cargo/luggage capacities capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as of your vehicle with varying seating configurations shown in step 4. and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

212 213 Safety Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the WARNING! stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Over- WARNING! sluggish response or over responsiveness in the loading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle han- steering. • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and dling, and increase your stopping distance. Use NOTE: tires of the recommended load capacity for your can cause collisions. vehicle. Never overload them. • Underinflation increases tire flexing and can • Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause result in overheating and tire failure. erratic and unpredictable steering response. • Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cush- • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause Tires — General Information ion shock. Objects on the road and chuck- the vehicle to drift left or right. holes can cause damage that result in tire Tire Pressure failure. Fuel Economy • Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resis- vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, result- and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four pri- tance resulting in higher fuel consumption. ing in loss of vehicle control. mary areas are affected by improper tire pressure: • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering Tread Wear • Safety and Vehicle Stability problems. You could lose control of your ve- Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause ab- • Economy hicle. normal wear patterns and reduced tread life, result- • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the • Tread Wear ing in the need for earlier tire replacement. vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE • Ride Comfort drift to the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable recommended cold tire inflation pressure. ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncom- fortable ride.

214 Tire Inflation Pressures minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation and reduced vehicle loading may be required for The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on pressure molded into the tire sidewall. high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your autho- the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's rized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer side door. Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide for recommended safe operating speeds, loading range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures At least once a month: and cold tire inflation pressures. vary with temperature changes. • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) WARNING! per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this judgement when determining proper inflation. High speed driving with your vehicle under in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, Tires may look properly inflated even when they maximum load is dangerous. The added strain especially in the Winter. are under-inflated. on your tires could cause them to fail. Youcould • Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle damage. the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). CAUTION! (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition. Radial Ply Tires After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will pre- WARNING! vent moisture and dirt from entering the valve 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this stem, which could damage the valve stem. normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be Combining radial ply tires with other types of too low. tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to Inflation pressures specified on the placard are al- handle poorly. The instability could cause a col- Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation ways “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation lision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires. pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation 215 Tire Repair It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at Tread Wear Indicators full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment flat mode. it meets the following criteria: tires to help you in determining when your tires • The tire has not been driven on when flat. See the tire pressure monitoring section for more should be replaced. information. • The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable). Tire Spinning • The puncture is no greater than a 1/4 of an inch When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, (6 mm). do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continu- additional information. ously without stopping. Tire Tread Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced Emergency” for further information. 1 — Worn Tire immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical 2—NewTire size and service description (Load Index and Speed WARNING! Symbol). Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces These indicators are molded into the bottom of the Run Flat Tires — If Equipped generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more the tire should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat than 30 seconds continuously when you are Tires” in this section for further information. mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches wheel, no matter what the speed. the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. 216 Life Of Tire Replacement Tires It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any ques- The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of tions you may have on tire specifications or capabil- factors including, but not limited to: many characteristics. They should be inspected ity. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation • Driving style. adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends your vehicle. • Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres- that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, sures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop quality and performance when replacement is WARNING! across the tire tread. These abnormal wear pat- needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear terns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and • Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or earlier tire replacement. Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certifi- speed rating other than that specified for your • Distance driven. cation Label for the size designation of your tire. vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will tires and wheels may change suspension higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire scheduled maintenance is highly recommended. braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre- Safety Information” section of this manual for more dictable handling and stress to steering and information relating to the Load Index and Speed WARNING! suspension components. Youcould lose control Symbol of a tire. and have a collision resulting in serious injury or Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after It is recommended to replace the two front tires or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Fail- two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can load ratings approved for your vehicle. ure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or failure. You could lose control and have a colli- replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifi- capacity, other than what was originally sion resulting in serious injury or death. equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a cations match those of the original wheels. smaller load index could result in tire overload- Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as ing and failure. You could lose control and little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from have a collision. contact with oil, grease, and gasoline. 217 Summer Or Three Season Tires — Snow Tires WARNING! If Equipped • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having Some areas of the country require the use of snow adequate speed capability can result in sud- Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified den tire failure and loss of vehicle control. conditions, and are not intended to be driven in by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire side- snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with wall. Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed CAUTION! for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter If you need snow tires, tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures select tires equivalent in Replacing original tires with tires of a different are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with size and type to the original size may result in false speedometer and odom- ice or snow. For more information, contact an au- equipment tires. Use snow eter readings. thorized dealer. tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may ad- Tire Types Summer tires do not contain the all season designa- versely affect the safety tion or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire side- and handling of your vehicle. All Season Tires — If Equipped wall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than All Season tires provide traction for all seasons do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. what was originally equipped with your vehicle and (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels should not be operated at sustained speeds over may vary between different all season tires. All sea- WARNING! 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph son tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an autho- MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. rized tire dealer for recommended safe operating tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may ad- Youcould lose vehicle control, resulting in severe speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. versely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types. 218 Spare Tires — If Equipped Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a And Wheel — If Equipped conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since Refer to the applicable section in the appropriate the wheel is designed specifically for the compact chapter in the Owner’s Manual at www.mopar.com/ Yourvehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and spare tire. Do not install more than one compact en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. Residents) or wheel equivalent in look and function to the original spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) for equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear time. further information. axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead WARNING! of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the Case Of Emergency” in your Owner’s Manual at recommended tire rotation pattern. Compact and collapsible spares are for tempo- www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html rary emergency use only. With these spares, do Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Cana- not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Tempo- dian Residents) for further information. The compact spare is for temporary emergency use rary use spares have limited tread life. When the only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the CAUTION! with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. description on the Tire and Loading Information Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare take your vehicle through an automatic car wash tire failure and loss of vehicle control. on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire de- with a compact or limited use temporary spare scriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency T,S=Temporary Spare Tire use only. Youcan identify if your vehicle is equipped Since this tire has limited tread life, the original with a collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and description on the Tire and Loading Information reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity. Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.

219 Collapsible spare tire description example: Full Size Spare — If Equipped 165/80-17 101P. WARNING! The full size spare is for temporary emergency use Since this tire has limited tread life, the original only. This tire may look like the originally equipped Limited use spares are for emergency use only. equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity. not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. more than the speed listed on the limited use When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is prop- spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire infla- the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be erly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tion pressures listed on your Tire and Loading replaced. Since it is not the same as your original tire using the electric air pump before lowering the Information Placard located on the driver’s side equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original vehicle. B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a first opportunity. the first opportunity and reinstall it on your ve- conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, hicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of since the wheel is designed specifically for the col- Limited Use Spare — If Equipped vehicle control. lapsible spare tire. The limited use spare tire is for temporary emer- gency use only. This tire is identified by a label Wheel And Wheel Trim Care WARNING! located on the limited use spare wheel. This label All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and contains the driving limitations for this spare. This Compact and Collapsible spares are for tempo- chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly tire may look like the original equipped tire on the rary emergency use only. With these spares, do using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Tempo- their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels rary use spares have limited tread life. When the Installation of this limited use spare tire affects ve- with the same soap solution recommended for the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the hicle handling. Since it is not the same as your body of the vehicle. temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the origi- Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to nal equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the Yourwheels are susceptible to deterioration caused your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare first opportunity. by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, cal- tire failure and loss of vehicle control. cium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. 220 Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff CAUTION! Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle coating that helps keep them from corroding and brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These CAUTION! tarnishing. products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty CAUTION! Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abra- Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recom- sives, or polishing compounds. They will perma- Avoid products or automatic car washes that use mended. nently damage this finish and such damage is not acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners NOTE: HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP and automatic car washes may damage the If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not extended period after cleaning the wheels with on a regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish. covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or brakes to remove the water droplets from the brake equivalent is recommended. components. This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle vibration When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including ex- when braking. cessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selec- tion of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equip- ment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or select a non- abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.

221 DEPARTMENT OF Treadwear Traction Grades TRANSPORTATION The Treadwear grade is a comparative rat- The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY ing, based on the wear rate of the tire when are AA, A, B, and C. These grades repre- GRADES tested under controlled conditions on a sent the tire's ability to stop on wet pave- specified government test course. For ex- ment, as measured under controlled condi- The following tire grading categories were ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one tions on specified government test surfaces established by the National Highway Traffic and one-half times as well on the govern- of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C Safety Administration. The specific grade ment course as a tire graded 100. The rela- may have poor traction performance. rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in tive performance of tires depends upon the each category is shown on the sidewall of actual conditions of their use, however, and WARNING! the tires on your vehicle. may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service prac- The traction grade assigned to this tire is All passenger vehicle tires must conform to based on straight-ahead braking traction Federal safety requirements in addition to tices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. tests, and does not include acceleration, these grades. cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

222 Temperature Grades Sustained high temperature can cause the WARNING! The Temperature grades are A (the high- material of the tire to degenerate and re- duce tire life, and excessive temperature can est), B, and C, representing the tire's resis- The temperature grade for this tire is lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C tance to the generation of heat and its abil- established for a tire that is properly in- corresponds to a level of performance, flated and not overloaded. Excessive ity to dissipate heat, when tested under which all passenger vehicle tires must meet speed, under-inflation, or excessive load- controlled conditions on a specified indoor under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety ing, either separately or in combination, laboratory test wheel. Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre- can cause heat buildup and possible tire sent higher levels of performance on the failure. laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

223 224 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE FLUIDSANDLUBRICANTS...... 228 MOPARACCESSORIES...... 230 SPECIFICATIONS...... 226 Engine ...... 228 Authentic Accessories By Mopar ...... 230 Torque Specifications ...... 226 Chassis...... 230 FLUID CAPACITIES...... 227

225 Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mount- WHEEL AND TIRE WARNING! TORQUE ing the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the SPECIFICATIONS Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and insert it halfway). reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex) deep wall socket. Torque Specifications Lug Nut/Bolt **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/Bolt Torque Bolt Size Socket Size 100 Ft-Lbs M12 x 1.5 19 mm (135 N·m)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS **Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening. Torque Pattern

After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel.

226 FLUID CAPACITIES U.S. Metric Fuel (Approximate) 3.6L Engines 16.5 Gallons 62 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20 , API Certified) 5 quarts 4.7 liters Cooling System* 3.6 Liter Engine Coolant (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula with deionized, 14.5 Quarts 13.7 Liters or distilled water for proper corrosion protection) Battery Coolant (Contact your authorized dealer for service) 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters Power Electronics Coolant (Contact your authorized dealer for service) 3.7 Quarts 3.5 Liters * Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.

NOTE: Battery Coolant and Power Electronics Coolant res- ervoir require a special tool to service the coolant system. Contact your authorized dealer for service.

227 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Engine Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology)with deionized, or distilled water for proper corrosion protection or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. Battery Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology)with deionized, or distilled water for proper corrosion protection or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. Power Electric Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology)with deionized, or distilled water for proper corrosion protection or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter. Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs. Fuel Selection 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85). TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

228 CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti- freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (an- tifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au- thorized dealer as soon as possible. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based en- gine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radia- tor engine coolant and may plug the radiator. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti- freeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

229 Chassis Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids. Refrigerant Use only refrigerant R-1234yf Charge Amounts: Single A/C System — 880g (1.94 lb) Dual A/C System — 1050g (2.31 lb) Compressor Oil Use only POE: Single A/C System — 140 ml Dual A/C System — 190 ml

MOPAR ACCESSORIES • In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain far NOTE: more than expressive style, premium protection, All parts are subject to availability. Authentic Accessories By Mopar or extreme entertainment, you also benefit from enhancing your vehicle with accessories that have • The following highlights just some of the many TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS been thoroughly tested and factory-approved. Authentic Chrysler Accessories by Mopar featur- ing a fit, finish, and functionality specifically for • For the full line of Authentic Chrysler Accessories your Chrysler Pacifica Hybrid. by Mopar visit your local dealership or online at mopar.com for U.S. residents and mopar.ca for Canadian residents.

230 EXTERIOR: • Front Air Deflector • Body Side Molding • Molded Splash Guards • Wheel Locks • Roof Rack • Side Window Air Deflectors • Molded Running Boards • License Plate Frames • Mastershield Paint Sealant • Mastershield Undercoating

INTERIOR: • Premium Carpet Floor Mats • Door Sill Guards • Emergency First Aid Kit • Mastershield Fabric Protection • Premium Carpet Cargo Mat • Cargo Area Liner • Mastershield Leather Protection • All Weather (Slush) Mat • Roadside Emergency Kit • Storage TotesAnd Coolers • All Weather (Slush) Cargo Mat • Spare Tire Kit

ELECTRONICS: • Remote Start • Mopar Connect (WiFi) • Wireless Phone Charger • Electronic Vehicle Tracking System • Overhead DVD Player Media System

CARRIERS: • Hitch-mount Bike Carrier • Roof Mount Bike Carrier • Roof Mount Cargo Carrier • Roof Mount Ski and Snowboard Carrier • TentKit • Roof Mount Canoe Carrier • Roof Mount Surf & Paddle Board Carrier • Roof Mount Kayak Carrier • Pet Kennel

231 232 MULTIMEDIA

MULTIMEDIA CYBERSECURITY...... 235 SiriusXM Guardian Activation ...... 252 Using The Rear Video USB Port ...... 266 UCONNECT 4/4C NAV WITH Download The Uconnect App ...... 252 Play Video Games ...... 266 8.4-INCH DISPLAY ...... 236 Uconnect App Info Page ...... 253 Headphones Operation ...... 267 Renewing Subscriptions Display Settings ...... 269 Uconnect 4/4C NAV At A Glance ...... 236 (Uconnect 4C NAV) ...... 255 Wireless Streaming — If Equipped ...... 269 Personalized Menu Bar ...... 238 Maintaining Your SiriusXM NAVIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . .271 Radio ...... 240 Guardian Account ...... 255 Media Hub — USB/Audio Jack (AUX) — Built-In Features ...... 255 Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt If Equipped ...... 241 Volume ...... 271 SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features .....257 Android Auto ...... 244 Finding Points Of Interest ...... 273 Apple CarPlay Integration ...... 247 AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL ...... 259 Finding A Place By Spelling The Name . . . .273 UCONNECT SETTINGS...... 249 UCONNECT THEATER — One-Step Voice Destination Entry ...... 273 IF EQUIPPED...... 260 Setting Your Home Location ...... 273 TIPS CONTROLS AND Uconnect Theater Overview ...... 260 Home...... 274 GENERALINFORMATION...... 250 Getting Started ...... 260 Adding A Stop ...... 275 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...... 250 Pairing The Remote ...... 261 TakingA Detour...... 275 Reception Conditions ...... 250 Unpairing The Remote ...... 261 SiriusXM Traffic Plus (4C NAV) ...... 275 Care And Maintenance ...... 250 Uconnect Theater Remote Control...... 262 SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) ...... 275 Anti-Theft Protection ...... 250 General Information...... 263 UCONNECT PHONE ...... 276 SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN — Play A DVD/Blu-ray Or USB Media File Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED ...... 251 From Uconnect System ...... 263 (Bluetooth Hands Free Calling) ...... 276 SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped DiscMenu...... 264 Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile (Available on Uconnect 4C NAV) ...... 251 Uconnect Theater Apps ...... 265 Phone ToThe Uconnect System ...... 277 233 Common Phone Commands (Examples) . . .280 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION SiriusXM Guardian (4C NAV) — Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone QUICK TIPS ...... 283 If Equipped ...... 287 During Call ...... 280 Introducing Uconnect ...... 283 Register (4C NAV) ...... 287 Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset Get Started ...... 283 Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C NAV) . . . .287 And Vehicle ...... 280 Basic Voice Commands ...... 284 Mobile App (4C NAV) ...... 288 Phonebook ...... 280 Radio ...... 284 SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) ...... 288 Voice Command Tips ...... 280 Media ...... 285 Apple CarPlay — If Equipped...... 289 Changing The Volume ...... 280 MULTIMEDIA Android Auto — If Equipped ...... 289 Using Do Not Disturb ...... 281 Phone ...... 285 General Information...... 290 Incoming TextMessages ...... 281 Climate (4C/4C NAV) ...... 286 Additional Information ...... 290 Helpful Tips And Common Questions Navigation (4C NAV) ...... 286 ToImprove Bluetooth Performance With Your Uconnect System ...... 282

234 NOTE: CYBERSECURITY WARNING! • FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may • It is not possible to know or to predict all of the directly regarding software updates. be equipped with both wired and wireless networks. possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems These networks allow your vehicle to send and re- • Tohelp further improve vehicle security and mini- are breached. It may be possible that vehicle ceive information. This information allows systems mize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle systems, including safety related systems, owners should: and features in your vehicle to function properly. could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control – Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/ Yourvehicle may be equipped with certain security could occur that may result in an accident software-update to learn about available features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and involving serious injury or death. Uconnect software updates. unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless • ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or – Only connect and use trusted media devices communications. Vehicle software technology con- CD) into your vehicle if it came from a trusted (e.g. personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs). source. Media of unknown origin could possi- tinues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, work- bly contain malicious software, and if installed Privacy of any wireless and wired communications ing with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropri- in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully ate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other for vehicle systems to be breached. intercept information and private communications devices, your vehicle may require software updates • As always, if you experience unusual vehicle without your consent. For further information, refer to improve the usability and performance of your behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest to “Data Collection & Privacy” in “Uconnect + systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthor- authorized dealer immediately. SiriusXM Guardian” in your Uconnect Owner's ized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems. Manual Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic Sys- tem (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual on your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html recent version of vehicle software (such as (U.S. Residents) www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Uconnect software) is installed. Residents).

235 UCONNECT 4/4C NAV WITH 8.4-INCH DISPLAY Uconnect 4/4C NAV At A Glance MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Radio Screen

236 • If the time is not displayed at the top of the screen, • Youcan return to the Radio screen by pressing the WARNING! press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen. In “X” located at the top right. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the the Settings screen, press the “Clock” button on Balance/Fade wheel. Youhave full responsibility and assume all the touchscreen, then check or uncheck this op- • Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the touch- risks related to the use of the Uconnect features, tion. screen to Balance audio between the front speak- SiriusXM Guardian services, and applications in • Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and Set ers or fade the audio between the rear and front this vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and Time Minutes to adjust the time. speakers. SiriusXM Guardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident • If these features are not available, uncheck the • Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or “Right” but- involving serious injury or death. Sync Time box. tons on the touchscreen or press and drag the • Press “X” to save your settings and exit out of the Speaker Icon to adjust the Balance/Fade. CAUTION! Clock Setting screen. Equalizer Background Themes — If Equipped • Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, activate the Equalizer screen. doing so can result in damage to the screen. • Screen background themes are selectable from a pre-loaded list of themes. If you’d like to set a • Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen, or Setting The Time theme, follow the instructions below. press and drag over the level bar for each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans be- • Model Uconnect 4/4C NAV synchronizes time • Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen. tween plus or minus nine, is displayed at the bot- automatically via GPS, so it should not require any • Press the “Display” button on the touchscreen. tom of each of the Bands. time adjustment. If you do need to set the time • Then press “Set Theme” button on the touch- Speed Adjusted Volume manually, follow the instructions below for Model screen and select a theme. Uconnect 4/4C NAV. • Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the Audio Settings • For Uconnect 4/4C NAV, turn the unit on, and touchscreen to activate the Speed Adjusted Vol- then press the time display at the top of the screen. • Press of the “Audio” button on the touchscreen to ume screen. The Speed Adjusted Volume is ad- Press “Yes.” activate the Audio settings screen to adjust justed by pressing the volume level indicator. This Balance\Fade, Equalizer, and Speed Adjusted alters the automatic adjustment of the audio vol- Volume. ume with variation to vehicle speed. 237 Personalized Menu Bar The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow these steps: MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Main Menu

238 1. Press the “Apps ” button to open the App screen. 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an existing shortcut in the main menu bar. The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the main menu bar, will now be an active App/shortcut. NOTE: This feature is only available if the vehicle is in PARK.

239 Radio MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Radio 1 — Radio Station Presets 7 — Audio Settings 2 — ToggleBetween Presets 8 — Seek Up 3 — Status Bar 9 — Direct Tune ToA Radio Station 4 — View Small Navigation Map 10 — Seek Down 5 — HD Radio 11 — Browse And Manage Presets 6 — Main Category Bar 12 — Radio Bands

240 Direct Tune • With an HD radio receiver, the listener is provided WARNING! with a clear sound that enhances the listening ex- • Tune directly to a radio station by pressing the perience. HD radio can also transmit data such as ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the “Tune” button on the screen, and entering the song title or artist. wheel. Youhave full responsibility and assume all desired station number. risks related to the use of the Uconnect features, Media Hub — USB/Audio Jack (AUX) SiriusXM Guardian services, and applications in Store Radio Presets Manually — If Equipped this vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and Yourradio can store 36 total preset stations, 12 pre- SiriusXM Guardian services when it is safe to do sets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They are shown so. Failure to do so may result in an accident at the top of your radio screen. Tosee the 12 preset involving serious injury or death. stations per band, press the arrow button on the • Toaccess the Radio mode, press the “Radio” but- touchscreen at the top right of the screen to toggle ton on the touchscreen. between the two sets of six presets. Selecting Radio Stations To store a radio preset manually, follow the steps below: • Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or SXM) button on the touchscreen. 1. Tune to the desired station. Seek Up/Seek Down 2. Press and hold the desired numbered button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds or • Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on the until you hear a confirmation beep. Uconnect Media Hub touchscreen for less than two seconds to seek through radio stations. HD Radio — If Equipped 1 — USB Port 2 — AUX Port • Press and hold either arrow button on the touch- • HD Radio (available on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV) screen for more than two seconds to bypass sta- operates similar to conventional radio except it tions without stopping. The radio will stop at the allows broadcasters to transmit a high-quality digi- next listenable station once the arrow button on tal signal. the touchscreen is released. 241 There are many ways to play music from MP3 play- USB Port Bluetooth Streaming Audio ers or USB devices through your vehicle's sound • Connect your compatible device using a USB • If equipped with Uconnect VoiceCommand, your system. Press your Media button on the touch- cable into the USB Port. USB Memory sticks with Bluetooth-equipped device may also be able to screen to begin. audio files can also be used. Audio from the device stream music to your vehicle's sound system. Your Audio Jack (AUX) can be played on the vehicles sound system while connected device must be Bluetooth-compatible providing metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) and paired with your system (see Uconnect Phone • The AUX allows a device to be plugged into the information on the radio display. for pairing instructions). Youcan access the music radio and utilize the vehicle’s sound system, using from your connected Bluetooth device by press-

MULTIMEDIA • When connected, the compatible USB device can a 3.5 mm audio cable, to amplify the source and ing the Bluetooth button on the touchscreen play through the vehicle speakers. be controlled using the radio or Steering Wheel Audio Controls to play,skip to the next or previous while in Media mode. • Pressing the “AUX” button on the touchscreen will track, browse, and list the contents. change the mode to auxiliary device if the audio jack is connected, allowing the music from your • The battery charges when plugged into the USB device to be heard through the vehicle's speakers. port (if supported by the specific device). Toactivate the AUX, plug in the audio jack. NOTE: • The functions of the device are controlled using When connecting your device for the first time, the the device buttons. The volume may be controlled system may take several minutes to read your mu- using the radio or device. sic, depending on the number of files. For example, • Toroute the audio cable out of the center console, the system will take approximately five minutes for use the access cut out in the front of the console. every 1,000 songs loaded on the device. Also dur- ing the reading process, the Shuffle and Browse functions will be disabled. This process is needed to ensure the full use of your features and only hap- pens the first time it is connected. After the first time, the reading process of your device will take considerably less time unless changes are made or new songs are added to the playlist.

242 Media Controls

Media Controls 1 — Repeat Music Track 5 — Show Songs Currently In Queue ToBe Played 2 — Music Track And Time 6 — Browse Music By 3 — Shuffle Music Tracks 7 — Music Source 4 — Music Track Information

243 The controls are accessed by pressing the desired 2. Connect your Android powered smartphone to 3. Once the device is connected and recognized, button on the touchscreen and choosing between one of the media USB ports in your vehicle. If the the “Phone” icon on the personalized menu bar AUX, USB, or Bluetooth. Android Auto app was not downloaded, the first will automatically change to the Android Auto time you plug your device in, the app will begin Icon. Android Auto should automatically launch, NOTE: to download. but if it does not launch automatically, refer to Uconnect will automatically switch to the appropri- the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for ate mode when something is first connected or NOTE: the procedure to enable the feature “Au- inserted into the system. Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable toShow”. You can also launch it by touching the

MULTIMEDIA that came with your phone, as aftermarket Android Auto icon on the touchscreen. Android Auto cables may not work. Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect system, Once Android Auto is up and running on your and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or higher, powered Uconnect radio, the following features can be uti- smartphone with a data plan, that allows you to lized using your smartphone’s data plan: project your smartphone and a number of its apps • Google Maps for navigation onto the touchscreen radio display. Android Auto • Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. for automatically brings you useful information, and music organizes it into simple cards that appear just when they are needed. Android Auto can be used with • Handsfree Calling, and Texting for communica- Google's best-in-class speech technology, the tion steering wheel controls, the knobs and buttons on • Hundred of compatible apps your radio faceplate, and the radio display’s touch- screen to control many of your apps. To use Android Auto Android Auto follow the following procedure: 1. Download the Android Auto app from the Google Play store on your Android-powered smartphone.

244 NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: Touse Android Auto, make sure you are in an area If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed, the If you are using the native Uconnect navigation with cellular coverage. Android Auto may use cel- native Uconnect VR will prompt you and any navi- system, and you try and start a new route using the lular data and your cellular coverage is shown in the gation command said will launch the native Android Auto, via voice or any other method, a upper right corner of the radio screen. Uconnect navigation system. pop-up will appear asking if you would like to switch from Uconnect navigation to smartphone naviga- While using Android Auto, Google Maps provides tion. A pop-up will also appear, asking if you’d like to voice-guided: switch, if Android Auto is currently in use and you • Navigation attempt to launch a native Uconnect route. Select- ing “Yes”will switch the navigation type to the newly • Live traffic information used method of navigation and a route will be • Lane guidance planned for the new destination. If “No” is selected the navigation type will remain unchanged. For further information, refer to www.android.com/auto/.

Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage For further information on the navigation function, please refer to https://support.google.com/android Maps or https://support.google.com/androidauto/. Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask Google to take you to a desired destination by voice. You can also Google Maps touch the Navigation icon in Android Auto to ac- cess Google Maps.

245 Music NOTE: Tosee the metadata for the music playing through Android Auto allows you to access and stream your Android Auto, select the Uconnect System’s media favorite music with apps like Google Play Music, screen. iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your smartphone’s data plan, you can stream endless music on the For further information refer to road. https://support.google.com/androidauto. NOTE: Communication MULTIMEDIA Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set up on With Android Auto connected, press and hold the your smartphone prior to using Android Auto, for VR button on the steering wheel to activate voice them to work with Android Auto. recognition specific to the Android Auto. This will Android Auto Phone allow you to send and reply to text messages, have incoming text messages read out loud, and place Apps and receive hands-free calls. The Android Auto App will display all the compat- ible apps that are available to use with Android Auto, every time it is launched. You must have the compatible app downloaded, and you must be signed in to the app for it to work with Android Auto. Refer to g.co/androidauto to see the latest list of available apps for Android Auto.

Android Auto Music

Android Auto Contact

246 Apple CarPlay Integration Manual Supplement for the procedure to enable NOTE: the feature “AutoShow”. You can also touch the Touse CarPlay make sure that cellular data is turned Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple CarPlay, the Apple CarPlay icon on the touchscreen to on, and that you are in an area with cellular cover- smarter, more secure way to use your iPhone in the launch it. age. Yourdata and cellular coverage is shown on the car, and stay focused on the road. Use your left side of the radio screen. Uconnect Touchscreen display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and your voice with Siri to get access to Apple Music, Maps, Messages, and more. Touse CarPlay, make sure you are using iPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings, ensure your iPhone is unlocked for the very first connection only, and then use the following procedure: 1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle. CarPlay CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage NOTE: Once CarPlay is up and running on your Uconnect Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning radio, the following features can be utilized using Phone cable that came with your phone, as aftermarket your iPhone’s data plan: cables may not work. With CarPlay, press and hold the VR button on the • Phone steering wheel to activate a Siri voice recognition 2. Once the device is connected and recognized, session. You can also press and hold the Home the “Phone” icon on the personalized menu bar • Music button within CarPlay to start talking to Siri. This will will automatically change to the Apple CarPlay • Messages allow you to make calls or listen to voice mail as you icon. Apple CarPlay should launch automati- • Maps normally would using Siri on your iPhone. cally, but if not, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s

247 NOTE: Messages NOTE: Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the Just like Phone, CarPlay allows you to use Siri to • If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed, steering wheel will launch a native VR session, not a send or reply to text messages. Siri can also read the native Uconnect VR will prompt you and any Siri session, and it will not function with CarPlay. incoming text messages, but driver’s will not be able navigation command said will launch the native Uconnect navigation system. Music to read messages, as everything is done via voice. • If you are using the native Uconnect navigation CarPlay allows you to access all your artists, play- Maps system, and you try and start a new route using lists, and music from iTunes. Using your iPhone’s MULTIMEDIA To use your Apple Maps for navigation on your CarPlay, via voice or any other method, a pop-up data plan, you can also use select third party audio Uconnect system, launch CarPlay, and push and will appear asking if you would like to switch from apps including music, news, sports, podcasts and Uconnect navigation to iPhone navigation. A hold the VR button on the steering wheel to use Siri more. pop-up will also appear, asking if you’d like to to set your desired destination. Alternatively, switch, if an CarPlay navigation is currently in use choose a Nearby destination by pressing Destina- and you attempt to launch a native Uconnect tions and selecting a category, by launching Siri route. Selecting “Yes” will switch the navigation from the destinations page, or even by typing in a type to the newly used method of navigation and a destination. route will be planned for the new destination. If “No” is selected the navigation type will remain unchanged.

Apple Music

Maps

248 Apps Personal Data, and System Information through buttons on the touchscreen. To use a compatible app with CarPlay, you must have the compatible app downloaded, and you Press the “Apps ” button, then press the must be signed in to the app. Refer to http:// “Settings ” button on the touchscreen to display www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ to see the latest list of the menu setting screen. When making a selection, available apps for CarPlay. press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and UCONNECT SETTINGS release the preferred setting “option” until a check- The Uconnect system allows you to access Cus- mark appears next to the setting, showing that set- Navigation Pop-Up tomer Programmable feature settings such as Key- ting has been selected. Once the setting is com- Sense, Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driv- plete, either press the Back Arrow button on the ing Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/ press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear of the settings screen. The following feature settings are available: • KeySense • Auto-On Comfort • Display • Engine Off Options • Units • Audio • Voice • Phone/Bluetooth • Clock • SiriusXM Setup • Safety & Driving Assistance • Restore Settings • Lights • Clear Personal Data • Doors & Locks • System Information

249 Refer to “Uconnect Settings” found within “Multi- Right Switch Care And Maintenance media” located in your Owner's Manual at • Push the switch up or down to increase or decrease Observe the following precautions to ensure the www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html the volume. (U.S. Residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Cana- system is fully operational: dian Residents) for further information. • Push the button in the center to change modes • The display lens should not come into contact with AM/FM/CD/SXM. pointed or rigid objects which could damage its TIPS CONTROLS AND Left Switch surface; use a soft, dry anti-static cloth to clean and do not press.

MULTIMEDIA GENERAL • Push the switch up or down to search for the next INFORMATION listenable station or select the next or previous CD • Never use alcohol, gas and derivatives to clean the track. display lens. Steering Wheel Audio Controls • Push the button in the center to select the next • Prevent any liquid from entering the system: this The steering wheel audio controls are located on preset station (radio) or to change CDs if could damage it beyond repair. the rear surface of the steering wheel. equipped with a CD Player. Anti-Theft Protection Reception Conditions The system is equipped with an anti-theft protec- Reception conditions change constantly while driv- tion system based on the exchange of information ing. Reception may be interfered with by the pres- with the electronic control unit (Body Computer) ence of mountains, buildings or bridges, especially on the vehicle. when you are far away from the broadcaster. This guarantees maximum safety and prevents the The volume may be increased when receiving traf- fic alerts and news. secret code from being entered after the power supply has been disconnected. If the check has a positive outcome, the system will start to operate, whereas if the comparison codes Steering Wheel Audio Controls are not the same or if the electronic control unit

250 (Body Computer) is replaced, the system will ask SiriusXM Guardian enhances your ownership and Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the the user to enter the secret code. See an authorized driving experience. When connected to an oper- easy-to-use SiriusXM Guardian services. dealer for further information. able network, you can: 1. The ASSIST and SOS Call buttons are located • Place a SOS Call to a SiriusXM Guardian operator on your rearview mirror. The ASSIST button is SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN — who can connect you to emergency responders. used for contacting Roadside Assistance, Vehicle IF EQUIPPED • Remotely lock/unlock your doors and start your Care, SiriusXM Guardian Care, and Uconnect vehicle from virtually anywhere, using the Care. The SOS Call button connects you to a SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped Uconnect App from your device. You can also do SiriusXM Guardian Care Agent, who can con- (Available on Uconnect 4C NAV) so by logging into your owner site, or by calling nect you to emergency services. SiriusXM Guardian Care when your vehicle has an 2. The Uconnect “Apps ” button is located in WARNING! operable network connection. Services can only the center of the menu bar of the radio touch- be used where coverage is available. screen. This is where you can manage your Apps. ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands • Receive text or email notifications if your vehicle's 3. The Uconnect Voice Command and Uconnect on the steering wheel. You have full responsibil- security alarm goes off. Phone buttons are located on the left side of ity and assume all risks related to the use of the • Receive stolen vehicle assistance, using GPS tech- your steering wheel. These buttons let you use features and applications in this vehicle. Only nology to help authorities locate your vehicle if it is your voice to give commands, make phone calls, use the features and applications when it is safe stolen. send and receive text messages hands-free, en- to do so. Failure to do so may result in an acci- • Get operator assistance using the ASSIST button ter navigation destinations, and control your ra- dent involving serious injury or death. on your interior rearview mirror. dio and media devices. NOTE: Yourvehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.

251 Included Trial Period For New Vehicles Why sign up for SiriusXM Guardian? Here are Download The Uconnect App just a few examples of things you’ll be able to do: Your new vehicle may come with an included trial You’re only a few steps away from using remote period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian services • Know that help, if you need it, is only a button commands and other valuable services. starting at the date of vehicle purchase (date based press away with Assist. on vehicle sales notification from your dealer). • Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from hundreds To activate the trial, you must first register with of miles away. SiriusXM Guardian. After the trial period, if you • Find your vehicle, no matter where you parked, wish to continue your SiriusXM Guardian services MULTIMEDIA using the convenient Vehicle Finder function. you can choose to purchase a subscription. • Use Send & Go to send a navigation route from SiriusXM Guardian Activation your mobile phone to your vehicle’s navigation Tounlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in system. your vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM For further information:. Guardian services. • U.S. residents visit: www.siriusxm.com/guardian 1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in- • Canadian residents visit: vehicle touchscreen. www.siriusxm.com/guardian/ca 2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of Mobile App apps. 3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a Touse the Uconnect App: SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent who • Search for and download the Uconnect app from will activate services in your vehicle, or select the store on your compatible iPhone or Android “Enter Email” to activate on the web. powered device. • Log in to the app using the email address and pass- word you created when you activated the services.

252 • Press the “Remote” button on the bottom menu Levels and Ranges Charge Status bar of the app to Lock/Unlock, Remote Start (if The “Levels and Ranges” section of the “Info” page The “Charge Status” section of the “Info” page equipped), and activate your horn and lights displays a graph that maps out how much range the remotely. indicates whether the vehicle is currently charging, vehicle currently has under electric and hybrid displays the amount of time it will take until the • Press the “Location” button on the bottom menu power individually and a total range for the vehicle. vehicle is 100% charged, and allows you to access bar of the app to bring up a map to locate your and change the charging schedule currently set for vehicle or send a location to your vehicle’s naviga- the vehicle. tion system. • Press the menu button (three horizontal lines) in the upper left corner of the app to access settings and support information. Uconnect App Info Page Within your Uconnect Mobile App is an “Info” page that gives you details about your vehicle’s levels and range, charging status, odometer, trip information, and oil life. To access the current info of your ve- hicle, just press the “Info” button on the Uconnect Mobile App bottom bar, and from there you can scroll through all the continuously updating info the Levels And Ranges app provides. 1 — TotalRange 2 — Hybrid Range Charge Status 3 — Electric Range 1 — Current Charging Status 2 — Time To100% Charge 3 — Charging Schedule Access

253 Odometer Select either Trip A or Trip B and the following Oil Life Remaining information will be displayed: The “Odometer” section of the “Info” page displays The “Oil Life Remaining” section of the “Info” page the amount of miles the vehicle has traveled total. • TotalMiles Traveled displays the current percentage of the oil life of the • TotalMiles Traveled on Electric Power vehicle and provides a chart for reference. • TotalMiles Traveled on Hybrid Power • Current MPG MULTIMEDIA

Odometer Oil Life Remaining Trip Information The “Trip Information” section of the “Info” page displays the information for both Trip A and Trip B, Trip Information set within the vehicle. 1 — Trip A Information 2 — Trip B Information

254 Renewing Subscriptions Built-In Features WARNING! (Uconnect 4C NAV) WARNING! • The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns Subscriptions can be purchased online by logging on the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument into your owner account. If you need help push the ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the panel if a malfunction is detected in any part of ASSIST button on the rearview mirror, then select wheel. Youhave full responsibility and assume all the airbag system. If the Air Bag Warning Light is SiriusXM Guardian Care or: risks related to the use of the Uconnect features, illuminated, the air bag system may not be work- ing properly and the SOS Call system may not SiriusXM Guardian services, and applications in • U.S. residents dial:1-844-796-4827 send a signal to a SOS Call operator if an air bag this vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and • Canadian residents dial:1-877-324-9091 is deployed. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illu- SiriusXM Guardian services when it is safe to do minated, have an authorized dealer service your Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian so. Failure to do so may result in an accident vehicle immediately. Account involving serious injury or death. • If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road Selling YourVehicle WARNING! conditions or location), do not wait for voice When you sell your vehicle, we recommend that contact from a SOS Call operator. All occu- pants should exit the vehicle immediately and you remove your SiriusXM Guardian Account in- • ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention move to a safe location. formation from the vehicle. You can do this by to the road. Some features are limited while • The SOS Call system is embedded into the pressing the ASSIST button in your vehicle and the vehicle is in motion. Some services, includ- vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after- selecting SiriusXM Guardian, or call: ing SOS, will NOT work without a subscrip- market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s • U.S. residents:1-844-796-4827 tion and an operable network connection. electrical system. This may prevent your ve- • Ignoring the rearview mirror light could mean hicle from sending a signal to initiate an emer- • Canadian residents:1-877-324-9091 you may not have SOS Call service if needed. gency call. To avoid interference that can If the rearview mirror light is illuminated, have cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add an authorized dealer service the SOS Call aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile system immediately. radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or modify the an- tennas on your vehicle.

255 • Roadside Assistance Call —Ifyougetaflat 2. Emergency SOS Call (If Equipped) — The WARNING! tire, or need a tow, you’ll be connected to rearview mirror contains a SOS Call button that, • IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY someone who can help anytime. Additional when pressed, may place a call from your vehicle POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING fees may apply.Additional information in this to a SiriusXM Guardian Care operator, who can DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), the section. connect you to emergency service operators, to Uconnect features, apps, and SiriusXM Guardian request help from local police, fire or ambulance • Uconnect Care — In vehicle support for services, among others, will not operate. personnel. If this button is accidentally pressed, Uconnect Apps and Features. you will have ten seconds to stop the call. To

MULTIMEDIA NOTE: • SiriusXM Guardian Care — In vehicle sup- cancel, press the SOS Call button again or press Yourvehicle may be transmitting data as authorized port for SiriusXM Guardian services. the “Cancel” button shown on the touchscreen. by the subscriber. After ten seconds has passed, the SOS call will • Vehicle Care — Totalsupport for your FCA be placed and only the SOS Call operator can 1. ASSIST Call (4C NAV) — The rearview mirror US LLC vehicle. contains an ASSIST button, allowing you to cancel it. The LED light on the rearview mirror speak to a call center agent for support: NOTE: will turn green once a connection to a SOS Call In order to provide SiriusXM Guardian Services to operator has been made. The green LED light you, we may record and monitor your conversations will turn off once the SOS Call is terminated. with Roadside Assistance, Uconnect Care, Have an authorized dealer service the vehicle if SiriusXM Guardian Care, or Vehicle Care, whether the rearview mirror light is continuously red. On such conversations are initiated through the equipped vehicles, this feature requires a func- SiriusXM Guardian services in your vehicle, your tioning electrical system, a subscription, and an device, or via a landline device, and may share operable network connection. If a connection is information obtained through such recording and made between a SOS Call operator and your monitoring in accordance with regulatory require- vehicle, you understand and agree that SOS ments. Youacknowledge, agree, and consent to any Call operators will stay on the line, even after SOS Call Button And ASSIST recording, monitoring or sharing of information ob- you connect with emergency services. 1 — SOS Call Button tained through any such call recordings. 2 — ASSIST Button

256 The Emergency services operator may, like stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to f. Select and purchase the desired subscription any other emergency call, record conversa- help recover it. Your vehicle must have an oper- option. The Wi-Fi Hotspot will activate after tions and sounds in and near your vehicle able network connection and must be registered a few minutes. upon connection. with SiriusXM Guardian with an active subscrip- For additional assistance, call AT&T Customer 3. Theft Alarm Notification — The Theft Alarm tion that includes the applicable feature. Care at: 866-595-1330. Notification feature notifies you via email or text 5. 4G Wi—Fi Hotspot — If Equipped — Allows NOTE: (SMS) message when the vehicle’s factory- you and your passengers to connect their por- Your vehicle must have a working electrical system installed security alarm system has been set-off. table devices to the built-in 4G Wi-Fi capabilities for any of the in vehicle SiriusXM Guardian services There are a number of reasons why your alarm of your Uconnect system. Purchasing 4G Wi-Fi to operate. may have been triggered, one of which could be Hotspot requires the use of an Internet-enabled that your vehicle was stolen. If so, please see the portable device. details of the Stolen Vehicle Assistance service SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features below. When you activate, Theft Alarm Notifi- a. Select Wi-Fi Hotspot located under the If you own a compatible iPhone or Android pow- cation is automatically set to send you an email at Uconnect “Apps” menu. ered device, the Uconnect App allows you to re- the email address you provide should the alarm b. Select the Setup Wi-Fi Hotspot option from motely lock or unlock your doors, start your engine go off. Youmay also opt to have a text message the touchscreen to locate your Hotspot or activate your horn and lights from virtually any- sent to your device. Name and Password. where. Your vehicle must be equipped with remote 4. Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If your vehicle is c. From your portable device Wi-Fi settings start, must have a SiriusXM Guardian subscription, stolen, contact local law enforcement immedi- menu, select the Hotspot Name from the list and must have an operable network connection. ately to file a stolen vehicle report. Once this of available networks and enter the provided Services can only be used where coverage is avail- report has been filed, SiriusXM Guardian Care Password. able. You can download the App from Mopar can help locate your vehicle. The SiriusXM Owner Connect or from the App Store (iPhone) d. Open the web browser on your portable Guardian Care agent will ask for the stolen ve- or Google Play Store (Android). Visit hicle report number issued by local law enforce- device and enter the following web address: www.att.com/myvehicleaccount. UconnectPhone.com to determine if your device is ment. As long as your vehicle has a SiriusXM compatible. For Uconnect Phone customer support Guardian subscription and an operable network e. Create a myVehicleaccount or log in to your and to determine if your device is compatible. connection, the agent may be able to locate the existing one. 257 U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or Touse this feature after the Uconncet App is down- Security PIN to confirm the request. Press the call 1-877-855-8400. loaded, login using your user name and password. “closed lock” icon on your Uconnect App to lock You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guardian the doors, and press the “open lock” icon to unlock Canadian residents - visit DriveUconnect.ca or Security PIN to confirm the request. Press the “re- the driver’s door. call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or mote start” icon on your Uconnect App to remotely call:1-800-387-9983 (French). You can set-up notifications for your account to start the vehicle. receive an email or text (SMS) message every time Remote Start (If Equipped) — This feature pro- You can set-up notifications for your account to a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Con- vides the ability to start the engine on your vehicle,

MULTIMEDIA receive an email or text (SMS) message every time nect at moparownerconnect.com and click on Edit without the keys and from virtually any distance. a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Con- Profile to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifica- Youcan send a request to your vehicle in one of two nect at moparownerconnect.com and click on Edit tions. ways: Profile to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifica- Remote Horn And Lights — It’s easy to locate a tions. 1. Using the Uconnect App from a compatible vehicle in a dark, crowded or noisy parking area by device. Remote Door Lock/Unlock — This feature pro- activating the horn and lights. It may also help if you 2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website. vides the ability to lock or unlock the door on your need to draw attention to your vehicle for any rea- vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any son. Youcan send a request to your vehicle in one of • After 15 minutes if you have not entered your distance. You can send a request to your vehicle in three ways: vehicle with the key, the engine will shut off one of three ways: automatically. 1. Using the Uconnect App from a compatible 1. Using the Uconnect App from a compatible device. • Youcan also send a command to turn-off an device. 2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website. engine that has been remote started. 2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website. 3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Care on • This remote function requires your vehicle to 3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Care on the phone. be equipped with a factory-installed Remote the phone. Start system. To utilize this feature after the Touse this feature after the Uconnect App is down- Uconnect App is downloaded, login with Touse this feature after the Uconnect App is down- loaded, login using your user name and password. your user name and password. loaded, login using your user name and password. You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guardian You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to confirm the request. Youcan set-up 258 notifications for your account to receive an email or Send & Go AUX/USB/MP3 text (SMS) message every time a command is sent. The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect Mobile Login to Mopar Owner Connect at CONTROL App allows you to search for a destination on your moparownerconnect.com and click on Edit Profile mobile device and then send the route to your There are numerous USB ports located throughout to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifications. vehicle’s Uconnect Navigation system. the vehicle. Vehicle Finder Tosend a navigation route to your vehicle: For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. The VehicleFinder feature of the Uconnect Mobile 1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect Mobile App allows you to find the location of your vehicle App bottom bar. when you can't remember where it's parked. You can also sound the alarm and flash the lights to 2. Either type in the destination you would like to make finding your vehicle even easier. navigate to, or search through one of the catego- ries provided. Tofind your vehicle: 3. Select the destination you want to route to from 1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect Mobile the list that appears. App bottom bar. 4. Press the “Send To Vehicle” button, and then 2. Select the “Vehicle” icon to determine the loca- confirm the destination by pressing “Yes,” to tion of your vehicle. send the navigation route to the Uconnect Navi- 3. Select the “Find Route” button that appears, gation in your vehicle. once your vehicle is located. 5. Finally, confirm the route inside your vehicle by Front Center Stack AUX Jack And 4. Select your preferred Navigation App to route a pressing the “Go Now” option on the pop-up USB Ports path to your vehicle. that appears on the touchscreen, when the ve- 1 — USB Port hicle is started. 2 — Aux Jack

The data USB ports are located on the instrument panel below the climate controls. 259 There are multiple USB “charge only” ports in this UCONNECT THEATER — Getting Started vehicle. IF EQUIPPED • In the center console Uconnect Theater Overview • On the back of the front row seats in the Uconnect Theater Media hubs Your Uconnect Theater is designed to give your family years of enjoyment. • Above the rear cup holders in the third row of seats There are multiple ways to interact with your MULTIMEDIA Uconnect Theater system. • Play your favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray Discs • Plug and play a variety of standard video games or devices into the HDMI port • Listen to audio over the wireless headphones • Plug and play a variety of devices into the Video USB port Uconnect Theater Screen • Plug in standard headphones to listen to audio (Rear Touchscreens) • Project your mobile phone, or tablet screen onto 1 — Uconnect Theater Touchscreen the rear Uconnect Theater touchscreens — 2 — Uconnect Radio (Front Touchscreen) If Equipped 3 — Uconnect Theater Media Hub Center Console USB Charging Port (AUX Output, HDMI Input, USB Charge Only Port) NOTE: The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge battery operated USB devices when connected.

260 There are three different ways to operate the fea- 5. Test to make sure the remote is successfully 1. Press the Settings icon found in the lower right tures of the Uconnect Theater: paired by dragging your finger across the ges- portion of the Uconnect Theater touchscreen. • The Remote Control ture pad. If you do not see the on screen arrow, 2. Press the “Remote” button towards the bottom try using the “Screen” button on the remote to • The Uconnect Radio of the Uconnect Theater touchscreen, within the switch between rear screen one and rear screen settings menu. • The Individual Uconnect Theater Touchscreens two to make sure the remote is controlling the 3. Select “Manage Remote Controls” from the Re- Pairing The Remote intended screen. It may take several seconds for the remote to react when initially paired. mote section of "Settings” and follow the on If the remote needs to be paired to your Uconnect screen instructions to complete the unpairing Theater system, follow the procedure below: NOTE: process. 1. Install batteries into both remotes. • If remote is ever non-operational, try re-pairing 4. Once complete, the remote will be ready to pair remote. 2. Press the Settings icon found in the lower right again. • The system can accommodate up to ten paired portion of the Uconnect Theater touchscreen. NOTE: remote controls. 3. Press the “Remote” button towards the bottom There will be a touchscreen notification message of the Uconnect Theater touchscreen, within the Unpairing The Remote when unpairing is successful. Repeat the above settings menu. steps to unpair a second remote. In events such as updating the Uconnect Theater 4. Press the “Pair Remote” option. Press the “OK” software, or taking a remote to another vehicle, the button. A touchscreen notification will appear remote will need to be unpaired from your indicating that your remote has been paired suc- Uconnect Theater system. Tounpair the remote: cessfully or unsuccessfully.

261 Uconnect Theater Remote Control 5. Fast Forward Button — Push and hold Replacing The Remote Control Batteries to fast forward through the current audio track or Each remote control requires two AAA batteries for video chapter. Push once to skip to the next operation. track. Toreplace the batteries: 6. Play/Pause Button — Begin/resume or pause disc play. 1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the remote, then slide the battery cover 7. Fast Rewind Button — Push and hold to downward. MULTIMEDIA fast rewind through the current audio track or video chapter. Push once to revert back to the 2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery re- cycling procedures for your area. previous track. 3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them 8. OK Button — Push to select the highlighted Remote Control according to the polarity diagram shown inside option in a menu. the battery compartment. 1. Gesture Pad — Control pointer position by run- 9. Screen Selector Button — Push the screen se- 4. Replace the battery compartment cover. ning your finger over this area and tapping to lector to toggle between screen 1 (Driver Side), select items on the touchscreen, functions similar or screen 2 (Passenger Side). to a mouse. 10. Back Button — Push to exit out of menus or 2. Mute Button — Mutes headphone audio. return to previous screen. 3. Home Button — Push to access available 11. Power Button — Turns the screen for the se- “Sources”. lected Channel on or off. 4. Arrow Buttons — Push the arrow 12. Screen Indicator — Indicates which screen (1 or buttons to highlight an item or scroll through 2) is being controlled by the remote control. menus.

262 General Information Play A DVD/Blu-ray Or USB Media 5. To play a DVD/Blu-ray disc on both screens simultaneously, select disc from both screen The following regulatory statement applies to all File From Uconnect System drop downs, or choose disc source on one screen Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this ve- 1. Insert a Blu-ray disc or DVD disc into the disc and push “View Screen” button on the other. hicle: player with the label facing up. Or insert a USB drive into rear Video USB port. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS stan- NOTE: dard(s). Operation is subject to the following two The DVD/Blu-ray Disc player and Video USB conditions: port are both located under the radio controls in 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, the instrument panel. and 2. Press the “Uconnect Theater” button on the ra- 2. This device must accept any interference re- dio touchscreen. ceived, including interference that may cause 3. Select Disc or USB from the source controls (i.e. undesired operation. select the desired source from the “Select Input 1” or “Select Input 2” menu for the respective NOTE: screen). Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void 4. For DVD/Blu-ray disc – press the “Press to En- the user’s authority to operate the equipment. ter” feature in the Movie Snapshot on radio touchscreen, then press “OK” on following screen. The steps to start a DVD are dependent DVD Blu-ray Disc Player on the steps required by that specific DVD. For 1 — Disc Player (Rear) USB Media Files - Press Music, Movie, or Fold- 2 — Rear Video USB Port ers, then select media title from list(s).

263 NOTE: 5. Listen In After selecting “Press to Enter” or the Movie Snap- Select this button to play one of the rear shot the control functions for that screen will ap- screens audio over the vehicle’s audio system. pear. These controls only apply to the individual screen selected and include: NOTE: Toview video content on the radio screen, bring the 1. Power vehicle to a stop. Press to turn “Selected Screen” On/Off.

MULTIMEDIA Disc Menu 2. Mute When listening to a CD Audio disc, CD Data disc, Mute rear headphones for selected source for Source Controls From The Uconnect DVD or Blu-ray, pushing the remote control’s arrow the current ignition cycle. Pressing mute again Radio — Uconnect Theater buttons will navigate the cursor on the rear touch- will unmute rear headphones. screen in the desired direction, on whichever touch- 3. Lock screen is selected. The UP, DOWN, LEFT, and Press to enable/disable Remote Control func- RIGHT arrow buttons, and the OK and MENU tions and Rear Touchscreen Controls for the buttons on the remote, along with the correspond- selected source. ing buttons overlaid on the radio touchscreen, can be used to navigate the disc menu when it appears. 4. View This can be used to select specific chapters in a Select this button to view full screen video if movie, navigate special features, or to play the vehicle is not moving. Button is disabled when movie from the menu. not viewing a video source or when the vehicle is in motion. NOTE: Inserting a disc into the player will “auto play” the Media Control Screen disc if already in the "Disc" source menu on the rear screens.

264 Uconnect Theater Apps Select the Apps source card to play pre-loaded Are We There Yet?— Uconnect 4C NAV games. Pressing the “Help” button teaches users how to play each game. Pick from games: • Back Seat Bingo • Checkers • Hanging Fruit • License Plate Game • Math Flash Cards • Solitaire Are We There Yet?App • Sudoku Apps Home Screen • Tic TacToe When a navigation route has been set from the Uconnect radio, the second row passengers can use NOTE: “Are We There Yet?”for an animated screen show- To exit a game, push “Exit Button” then “Back Ar- ing distance and time remaining on navigation row,” or “Home Button” on the touchscreen. routes, as well as the estimated time of arrival with pop-up notifications. Notifications and their fre- quency can be set up for route information by using the arrow buttons, and can be turned on and off using the “Notifications” button on the “Are We There Yet?”App. Estimated time of arrival notifica- tions will pop-up at the bottom center of the screen. Sudoku App Home Screen

265 Using The Rear Video USB Port Play Video Games Connect the video game console to the HDMI 1 or 2 ports, located behind the first row seat. MULTIMEDIA

Search Screen

On the rear screen you can browse the content of the USB device by going to the USB source. Use the search feature to find your music faster.

Rear Video USB Port

Plug in a USB drive, iPhone, iPod or mass storage AUX/HDMI/USB device and play your favorite music or movies. 1 — AUX Jack (Headphone Output Only) 2 — HDMI Port NOTE: 3 — USB Port (Charge Only) To view USB media on the rear theater screens, insert a USB drive into the port next to the DVD/ NOTE: Blu-ray disc player. The USB drive port is located Certain high-end video games will exceed the under the radio controls in the instrument panel. power limit of the vehicle's Power Inverter. Refer to “Power Inverter” in “Getting ToKnow YourVehicle” in this guide for further information. 266 Headphones Operation The headphone power indicator and controls are located on the right ear cup. The headphones receive two separate channels of audio using an infrared transmitter from the video NOTE: screens. Uconnect Theater must be turned on before sound If no audio is heard after increasing the volume can be heard from the headphones. To conserve control there are a number of things that can be battery life, the headphones will automatically turn done to troubleshoot the issue: off approximately three minutes after the Uconnect Theater system is turned off. • Verify that the screen is turned on. • Check to see that the channel is not muted. Changing The Audio Mode For Headphones • Make sure that the headphones are on. 1. Ensure the remote control and the headphones are on the same channel. • Verifythat the headphone channel selector button is on the desired channel. This button switches 2. Push the Home button on the remote control. Uconnect Theater Headphones between the audio of screen 1 and screen 2. 3. When the Home menu appears on the touch- • Install two new AAA type batteries in the 1 — Power ON/OFF Button screen, use the arrow buttons on the remote headphones. 2 — Volume Control Wheel control to navigate to the available modes and 3 — Channel Selection Button push the OK button to select the new mode or use the Gesture Pad at the top of the remote control.

267 Toreplace the batteries: What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This war- 1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear ranty does not cover any damage or defect that cup of the headphones, and then slide the bat- results from misuse, abuse or modification of the tery cover downward. Product other than by Delphi Automotive. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time through normal 2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery re- use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam cycling procedures for your area. is available for a nominal charge). DELPHI AUTO- 3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them MOTIVE IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES MULTIMEDIA according to the polarity diagram shown inside OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY the battery compartment. RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, 4. Replace the battery compartment cover. NOR IS DELPHI AUTOMOTIVE LIABLE FOR Delphi Automotive Stereo Headphone Life- ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDI- time Limited Warranty RECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EX- Uconnect Theater Headphones EMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty 1 — Volume Control Wheel OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER. 2 — Channel Selection Button covers the initial user or purchaser ("you" or "your") Some states and jurisdictions may not allow the of this particular Delphi Automotive ("Delphi") exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequen- wireless headphone ("Product"). The warranty is tial damages, so the above limitation may not apply Replacing The Headphone Batteries not transferable. to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from Each set of headphones requires two AAA batter- How Long Does the Coverage Last? This war- jurisdiction to jurisdiction. ies for operation. ranty lasts as long as you own the Product. What Will Delphi Automotive Do? Delphi Auto- What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as motive, at its option, will repair or replace any de- specified below, this warranty covers any Product fective Product. Delphi Automotive reserves the that in normal use is defective in workmanship or right to replace any discontinued Product with a materials. comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE 268 SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, Wireless Streaming — If Equipped SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY Your Uconnect Theater System may be equipped REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND with Wireless Streaming functionality that allows IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EX- you to project your smartphone or tablet onto your PRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WAR- rear Uconnect Theater touchscreens. This Source RANTY FOR MERCHANTABILITY OR FIT- Card will allow you to wirelessly link your compatible NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Android devices to your Uconnect Theater system If you have any questions or comments regarding and stream your device onto the touchscreens. your Delphi Automotive wireless headphones, or to Choose the Wireless Streaming Source Card on register your wireless headphones, please phone: Streaming Source On Front Uconnect your rear Uconnect Theater touchscreen. Touchscreen 1-888-293-3332 NOTE: Display Settings For system compatibility, consult your device's When watching a video source, pushing “Settings” owner's manual or www.uconnectphone.com to see icon on the touchscreen activates the Settings if your device supports wireless streaming technol- menu. These settings control the appearance of the ogy compatibility. Apple devices do not support video on the screen. The factory default settings are this feature. already set for optimum viewing, so there is no need To link your device to the rear Uconnect Theater to change these settings under normal circum- touchscreens: stances. Wireless Streaming Source Card 1. Enable your device’s Wi-Fi Tochange the settings, use one of the touchscreens or remote. To reset all values back to the original The first row passengers can also access wireless 2. Select the Wireless Streaming feature on your settings, select the “Reset to Defaults” then select streaming by choosing the source in the Uconnect device “YES.” Theater menu on the front Uconnect touchscreen.

269 NOTE: Your phone will be added as an additional source Settings Refer to your device's user manual or card on the Uconnect Theater touchscreens. Below is a list of the settings available for the Wireless www.uconnectphone.com for further information. NOTE: Streaming feature of your Uconnect Theater system: 3. Select the Pacifica Wireless Network from the The Authentication Screen will appear on both rear list of available networks on your device touchscreens. The touchscreen screen on which 4. When prompted by an Authentication Screen, “Accept” is selected will be the primary controller press Accept on the touchscreen to begin wire- for the wireless streaming session.

MULTIMEDIA less streaming on your device. If prompted, NOTE: verify that the code on the rear touchscreen and the device match. • Some devices will allow you to control your device through the Uconnect Theater rear touchscreens. They will react to your selections from the touch- screen and be represented on your device as well. When supported, the Uconnect Theater task bar will Wireless Streaming Settings appear at the top and bottom of the Uconnect The- ater touchscreen, framing your streaming device. • Wireless: ON/OFF – Turnon and off the wireless • Devices that do not support this feature will not feature of the Uconnect Theater system. respond to Uconnect Theater touchscreen but • Manage Devices – Allows the user to delete the can still be controlled using the streaming device. paired devices. • Local Network Name – Allows the user to rename Streaming Device Source Card the Pacifica Wireless Network. Refer to the Wireless Streaming video on Mopar’s Youtube Channel at www.youtube.com/ DriveUconnect for tips and additional information on the Wireless Streaming function.

270 NAVIGATION — Changing The Navigation Voice IF EQUIPPED Prompt Volume 1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen in • The information in the section below is only appli- the lower right area of the screen. cable if you have the 4C NAV system. 2. In the Settings menu, press the “Guidance” but- Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in the ton on the touchscreen. menu bar to access the Navigation system. 3. In the Guidance menu, adjust the Nav Volume by pressing the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen.

271 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Navigation 1 — Search For A Destination In All Categories 5 — Navigate ToSaved Work Destination 2 — Find A Destination 6 — Navigation Settings 3 — View Map 7 — Emergency 4 — Navigate ToSaved Home Destination 8 — Information

272 Finding Points Of Interest One-Step Voice Destination Entry Setting Your Home Location 1. From the main Navigation menu, press the • Enter a navigation destination without taking your • Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then hands off the wheel. menu bar to access the Navigation system and the press the “Points of Interest” button on the • Just push the Uconnect Voice Command Main Navigation menu. touchscreen. button on the steering wheel, wait for the beep and • Press the “Home” button on the touchscreen. 2. Select a category and then a subcategory, if say something like, "Find Address 800 Chrysler • Youmay enter your address directly, use your cur- necessary. Drive Auburn Hills MI." rent location as your home address, or choose 3. Select your destination and press the “GO!” but- NOTE: from recently found locations. ton on the touchscreen. Destination entry is not available while your vehicle • To delete your Home location (or other saved is in motion. However, you can also use VoiceCom- locations) so you can save a new Home location, Finding A Place By Spelling The Name mands to enter an address while moving. Refer to press the “Home” button on the touchscreen, and • From the Main Navigation Menu press the “Uconnect Voice Recognition Quick Tips” in this in the “GO!” screen press the “Options” button on “Where to?” button on the touchscreen, press the section for further information. the touchscreen. In the Options menu press the “Points of Interest” button on the touchscreen, “Clear Home” button on the touchscreen. Set a then press the “Spell Name” button on the touch- new Home location by following the previous screen. instructions. • Enter the name of your destination. • Press the “List” button on the touchscreen. • Select your destination and press the “GO!” but- ton on the touchscreen.

273 Home • A Home location must be saved in the system. From the Main Navigation menu, press the “Home” button on the touchscreen. MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Map 1 — Distance ToNext Turn 5 — Your Location On The Map 2 — Next Turn Street 6 — Navigation Main Menu 3 — Estimated Time Of Arrival 7 — Current Street Location 4 — Zoom In And Out 8 — Navigation Routing Options

274 Your route is marked with a blue line on the map. If SiriusXM Traffic Plus (4C NAV) • Fuel Prices — Check local gas and diesel prices in you depart from the original route, your route is your area and route to the station of your choice. Don't Drive Through Traffic. Drive Around It. recalculated. A speed limit icon could appear as you Avoid congestion before you reach it. By enhancing • Movie Listings — Check local movie theatres and travel on major roadways. listings in your area and route to the theater of your your vehicle's navigation system with the ability to choice. Adding A Stop see detailed traffic information, you can pinpoint • Sports Scores — In-game and final scores as well • Toadd a stop you must be navigating a route. traffic incidents, determine average traffic speed and estimate travel time along your route. Since the as weekly schedules. • Press the “Menu” button on the touchscreen to service is integrated with a vehicle's navigation sys- • Weather — Check variety of local and national return to the Main Navigation menu. tem, SiriusXM Traffic Plus can help drivers pick the weather information from radar maps to current • Press the “Where To?”button on the touchscreen, fastest route based on traffic conditions. and 5-day forecast. then search for the extra stop. When another loca- • Detailed information on traffic speed, accidents, SiriusXM Travel Link feature is completely inte- tion has been selected, you can choose to cancel construction, and road closings. grated into your vehicle. A few minutes after you your previous route, add as the first destination or • Traffic information from multiple sources, includ- start your vehicle, Travel Link information arrives add as the last destination. ing police and emergency services, cameras and and updates in the background. Youcan access the • Press the desired selection and press the “GO!” road sensors. information whenever you like, with no waiting. button on the touchscreen. Coast-to-coast delivery of traffic information. • Toaccess SiriusXM Travel Link, press “Apps” button View conditions for points along your route and • on the touchscreen, then press the “SiriusXM Travel TakingA Detour beyond. Available in over 130 markets. Link” button on the touchscreen. • Totake a detour you must be navigating a route. SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) NOTE: • Press the “Detour” button on the touchscreen. In addition to delivering over 130 channels of the best SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription, sold NOTE: sports, entertainment, talk, and commercial-free mu- separately after the trial subscription included with If the route you are currently taking is the only sic, SiriusXM offers premium data services that work in your vehicle purchase. reasonable option, the device may not calculate a conjunction with compatible navigation systems. detour. For more information, see your Uconnect SiriusXM Travel Link brings a wealth of useful infor- Owner's Manual Supplement. mation into your vehicle and right to your fingertips. 275 UCONNECT PHONE Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free Calling) MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone Menu 1 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone 11 — Recent Call Log 2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength 12 — Favorite Contacts 3 — Do Not Disturb 13 — Mute Microphone 4 — Reply with TextMessage 14 — Decline Incoming Call 5 — Current Phone Contact’s Name 15 — Answer/Redial/Hold 6 — Conference Call* 16 — Mobile Phone Battery Life 7 — Phone Pairing 17 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System 8 — TextMessaging Menu** * — Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices 9 — Direct Dial Pad ** — Textmessaging feature not available on all mobile phones 10 — Contact Menu (requires Bluetooth MAP profile)

276 The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to place • For Uconnect Customer Care: Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio and receive hands-free mobile phone calls. Drivers • U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com or Uconnect 4C, 4C NAV: can also place mobile phone calls using their voice call 1-877-855-8400. or by using the buttons on the touchscreen (see Voice Command section). • Canadian residents visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or The hands-free calling feature is made possible 1-800-3879983 (French). through Bluetooth technology — the global stan- dard that enables different electronic devices to Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your connect to each other wirelessly. Mobile Phone ToThe Uconnect If the Uconnect Phone Button exists on your System steering wheel, you then have the Uconnect Phone Mobile phone pairing is the process of establishing features. a wireless connection between a cellular phone and the Uconnect system. NOTE: Uconnect 4C & 4C NAV • The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone NOTE: 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position. equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile, • Touse the Uconnect Phone feature, you first must Version 1.0 or higher. determine if your mobile phone and software are 2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu Bar on the touchscreen. • Most mobile phones/devices are compatible with compatible with the Uconnect system. Please visit the Uconnect system, however some mobile UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone 3. Select “Pairing.” compatibility information. phones/devices may not be equipped with all of 4. Select “Paired Phones.” the required features to utilize all of the Uconnect • Mobile phone pairing is not available while the 5. Select “Add device.” system features. vehicle is in motion. • A maximum of ten mobile phones can be paired to • Uconnect Phone will display an “In progress” the Uconnect system. screen while the system is connecting.

277 Pair YouriPhone: Complete The iPhone Pairing Procedure: Select The iPhone's Priority Level When the pairing process has successfully com- pleted, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this mobile phone the highest priority. This mobile phone will take prece- dence over other paired mobile phones within range and will connect to the Uconnect system MULTIMEDIA automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio device can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply select “Uconnect” from Pairing Request the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth screen, 1. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept and the Uconnect system will reconnect to the the connection request from Uconnect Phone. Bluetooth device. Bluetooth On/Uconnect Device NOTE: To search for available devices on your Bluetooth Some mobile phones will require you to enter enabled iPhone: the PIN number. 1. Press the Settings button. 2. Select Bluetooth. • Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to search for Bluetooth connections. 3. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”. 278 Pair YourAndroid Device: • Youmay be prompted by your mobile phone NOTE: to download the phonebook, check “Do Not Some mobile phones require the PIN to be Ask Again” to automatically download the entered manually, enter the PIN number shown phonebook. This is so you can make calls by on the Uconnect screen. saying the name of your contact. Select The Android Mobile Phone's Priority Complete The Android Pairing Procedure: Level When the pairing process has successfully com- pleted, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this mobile phone the highest priority. This mobile phone will take prece- Uconnect Device dence over other paired mobile phones within To search for available devices on your Bluetooth range and will connect to the Uconnect system enabled Android Device: automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio device 1. Push the Menu button. can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. 2. Select Settings. If “No” is selected, simply select “Uconnect” from 3. Select Connections. the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth screen, and the Uconnect system will reconnect to the 4. Turn Bluetooth setting to “On.” Pairing Request Bluetooth device. • Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled. You are now ready to make hands-free calls. Press 1. Confirm the passkey shown on the mobile phone Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin the Uconnect “Phone” button on your steer- matches the passkey shown on the Uconnect to search for Bluetooth connections. ing wheel to begin. system then accept the Bluetooth pairing 5. Once your mobile phone finds the Uconnect request. system, select “Uconnect”. 279 NOTE: Phonebook • If you are listening to available voice command Refer to UconnectPhone.com website for addi- options, you do not have to listen to the entire list. tional information on mobile phone pairing and for The Uconnect system will automatically sync your When you hear the command that you need, push a list of compatible phones. phonebook from your paired phone, if this feature is the button on the steering wheel, wait for supported by your phone. Phonebook contacts are the beep and say your command. Common Phone Commands updated each time that the phone is connected. If (Examples) your phone book entries do not appear, check the Changing The Volume • “Call John Smith” settings on your phone. Some phones require you • Start a dialogue by pushing the VR button , MULTIMEDIA to enable this feature manually. then say a command. For example, "Help". • “Call John Smith mobile” • Yourphonebook can be browsed on the Uconnect • Use the radio VOLUME/MUTE rotary knob to • “Dial 1 248 555 1212” system touchscreen, but editing can only be done adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the • “Redial” on your phone. Tobrowse, press the “Phone” but- Uconnect system is speaking. Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone ton on the touchscreen, then the “Phonebook” NOTE: button on the touchscreen. During Call The volume setting for Uconnect is different than the audio system. • During a call, press the “Mute” button on the Favorite phonebook entries can be saved as Favor- Phone main screen to mute and unmute the call. ites for quicker access. Favorites are shown at the NOTE: top of the main phone screen. To access help, push the Uconnect VR button Transfer Ongoing Call Between Voice Command Tips (if active) on the steering wheel and say Handset And Vehicle "help." Push the Uconnect VR Pickup button • During an on-going call, press the “Transfer” but- • Speaking complete names (i.e; Call John Doe vs. (if active) or the VR button (if active) and say ton on the Phone main screen to transfer an on- Call John) will result in greater system accuracy. "cancel" to cancel the help session. going call between handset and vehicle. • You can “link” commands together for faster re- sults. Say “Call John Doe, mobile,” for example.

280 Using Do Not Disturb NOTE: 3. Select located under DEVICES next to Uconnect. With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications • Only the beginning of your custom message will from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep be seen on the touchscreen. 4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on. your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For • Reply with text message is not compatible with your convenience, there is a counter display to keep iPhones. track of your missed calls and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb. • Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP. Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call or both, when declining an incoming Incoming TextMessages call and send it to voicemail. After pairing your Uconnect system with a Automatic reply messages can be: Bluetooth enabled mobile device with the Message • “I am driving right now, I will get back to you Access Profile (MAP), the Uconnect system can shortly.” announce a new incoming text message and read it to you over the vehicle’s audio system. • Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters. NOTE: While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be Only incoming text messages received during the Enable iPhone Incoming TextMessages selected so you can still place a second call without current ignition cycle can be viewed/read. Android Devices being interrupted by incoming calls. Toenable incoming text messaging: 1. Push the Menu button on the mobile phone. iPhone 2. Select Settings. 1. Press the settings button on the mobile phone. 3. Select Connections. 2. Select Bluetooth. • Ensure Bluetooth is enabled, and the mobile phone is paired to the Uconnect system. 281 4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on. NOTE: Mobile Phone won’t pair to system: All incoming text messages received during the • A pop up will appear asking you to accept a • Perform a hard reset in the mobile phone by re- current ignition cycle will be deleted from the request for permission to connect to your moving the battery (if removable — see your mo- Uconnect system when the ignition is turned to the bile phone’s owner manual). messages. Select “Don’t ask again” and press OFF position. OK. • Delete pairing history in mobile phone and Helpful Tips And Common Questions Uconnect system; usually found in phone’s ToImprove Bluetooth Performance Bluetooth connection settings.

MULTIMEDIA With Your Uconnect System • Verify you are selecting “Uconnect” in the discov- Mobile Phone won’t reconnect to system after ered Bluetooth devices on your mobile phone. pairing: • If your vehicle system generates a pin code the default is 0000. • Set mobile phone to auto-connect or trusted de- vice in mobile phone Bluetooth settings (Black- Mobile Phonebook didn’t download: berry devices). • Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the • Perform a factory reset on your mobile phone. “phonebook download” request on your mobile Refer to your mobile phone manufacturer or cel- phone. lular provider for instructions. • Up to 5,000 contact names with four numbers per • Many mobile phones do not automatically recon- contact will transfer to the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV nect after being restarted (hard reboot). Yourmo- system phonebook. Enable Android Device Incoming bile phone can still be connected manually. Close TextMessages all applications that may be operating (refer to mobile phone manufacturer’s instructions), and follow “Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) YourMo- bile Phone ToThe Uconnect System”.

282 Can’t make a conference call: UCONNECT VOICE Get Started • CDMA (Code-Division Multiple Access) carriers RECOGNITION QUICK All you need to control your Uconnect system with do not support conference calling. Refer to your your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel. mobile phone user’s manual for further TIPS information. 1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile de- Introducing Uconnect vice and feature compatibility and to find phone Making calls while connected to AUX: Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these pairing instructions. • Plugging in your mobile phone to AUX while con- helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Com- 2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and pas- nected to Bluetooth will disable Hands-Free Call- mands and tips you need to know to control your senger conversations are examples of noise that ing. Do not make calls while your mobile phone is Uconnect system. may impact recognition. plugged into the AUX jack. If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the 3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while Apps menus, of your touchscreen, you have the facing straight ahead. The microphone is located Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a in the headliner and aimed at the driver. Uconnect 4C system. 4. Each time you give a VoiceCommand, you must first push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.

283 5. You can interrupt the help message or system Uconnect Voice Recognition Button . Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button 1. Short Press: Push and release the VR button to recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the top and saying a Voice Command from current begin Radio, Climate, Navigation, and other em- of the touchscreen. category. bedded functions. After you hear the single beep, say a command. 2. Long Press: Push and hold continuously for a few seconds, then release the VR button for Siri

MULTIMEDIA functions. After you hear the familiar Siri "double beep," say a command. Phone Hang Up Button, Push to end a call. Basic Voice Commands The basic Voice Commands below can be given at Uconnect 4C/4C NAV any point while using your Uconnect system. Radio Push the VR button . After the beep, say… Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or • Cancel to stop a current voice session SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to Uconnect VR And Phone Buttons • Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.) 1 — Uconnect Phone Button • Repeat to listen to the system prompts again 2 — Uconnect Voice Recognition Button Push the VR button . After the beep, say… 3 — Phone Hang Up Button • Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM • Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1 Uconnect Phone Button , Push to initiate, answer, or end a phone call.

284 TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say Push the VR button . After the beep, say one Phone or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR of the following commands and follow the prompts Making and answering hands-free phone calls is button and say “Help.” The system will pro- to switch your media source or choose an artist. easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button vide you with a list of commands. • Change source to Bluetooth is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is • Change source to AUX ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions. • Change source to USB Push the Phone button . After the beep, say • Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; one of the following commands… Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre • Call John Smith Classical • Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen • Redial (call previous outgoing phone number) to see all of the music on your USB device. Your • Call back (call previous incoming phone number) Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio Voice Command must match exactly how the art- ist, album, song and genre information is displayed. Media Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and AUX de- vices. (Remote CD player optional and not avail- able on all vehicles.)

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media

285 TIP: When providing a VoiceCommand, push the Push the VR button . After the beep, say one 1. To enter a destination, push the VR button Phone button and say “Call,” then pronounce of the following commands: . After the beep, say: the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. • Set driver temperature to 70 degrees • For the 4C Uconnect System, say: “Enter When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.” • Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees state.” • For the 4C NAV Uconnect System, say: TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be “Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn used to adjust the interior temperature of your ve- Hills, Michigan.”

MULTIMEDIA hicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped. 2. Then follow the system prompts. TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button . After the beep, say: “Find nearest coffee shop.”

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone

Climate (4C/4C NAV)

Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Climate hands-free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with Navigation (4C NAV) climate control.) The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display time and become more productive when you know Navigation exactly how to get to where you want to go. (Navi- gation is optional on the Uconnect 4C system.)

286 SiriusXM Guardian (4C NAV) — SOS Call 2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps. If Equipped Theft Alarm Notification 3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a CAUTION! Remote Door Lock/Unlock SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent who Send & Go will activate services in your vehicle, or select Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including “Enter Email” to activate on the web. SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call will Vehicle Finder NOT work without an operable LTE (voice/ • U.S. residents visit: www.siriusxm.com/guardian. Stolen Vehicle Assistance data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection • Canadian residents visit: compatible with your device. Remote Vehicle Start** www.siriusxm.com/guardian/ca.

NOTE: Remote Horn & Lights Vehicle Health Report/Alert Yourvehicle may be transmitting data as authorized Roadside Assistance Call (4C NAV) by the subscriber. Vehicle Health Reports** Your vehicle will send you a monthly email report, An included trial and/or subscription is required to which summarizes the performance of your vehi- take advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian services Vehicle Health Alert** cle’s key systems so you can stay on top of your in the next section of this guide. To register with Performance Pages Plus** vehicle’s maintenance needs if you are registered SiriusXM Guardian, press the Apps button on the for SiriusXM Guardian. Your vehicle will also send Uconnect 4C/4C NAV touchscreen to get started. **If vehicle is equipped. you VehicleHealth Alerts when it detects issues with its key systems that need your attention. For further NOTE: Register (4C NAV) information go to the Owner Site website at SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped Tounlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html vehicles purchased within the continental United (U.S. residents) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Cana- States, Alaska, Hawaii and Canada. Services can your vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM dian Residents). only be used where coverage is available; see cov- Guardian services. erage map for details. 1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in- vehicle touchscreen.

287 Mobile App (4C NAV) • Press the Remote button on the navigation bar at Push the VR button . After the beep, say one the bottom of the app to Lock/Unlock, Remote of the following commands: You’re only a few steps away from using remote Start, and activate your horn and lights remotely. commands. • Show fuel prices • Press the Location button on the navigation bar at • Show 5 - day weather forecast the bottom of the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send a location to your vehicle’s • Show extended weather navigation system. TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice

MULTIMEDIA • Press the Settings button in the upper left corner Command. of the app to bring up app settings and access the Assist Call Centers. NOTE: For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents). SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, Mobile App check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings SiriusXM Travel Link Touse the Uconnect App: a wealth of information right to your Uconnect 4C • Download the Uconnect App to your mobile NAV system. (Not available for 4C system.) device. • Press the Info button on the navigation bar at the bottom of the app for Vehicle Info.

288 Apple CarPlay — If Equipped Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone” icon within Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to Android Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which rec- interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recog- ognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of nition system, and use your smartphone’s data plan your smartphone’s features: to project your iPhone and a number of its apps Maps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your • iPhone 5, or higher, to one of the media USB ports, • Music using the factory-provided Lightning cable, and • Phone press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your • TextMessages “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display • Additional Apps CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button on the steer- ing wheel, or press and hold the “Home” button Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supple- within Apple CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recog- ment for further information. nizes natural voice commands to use a list of your Android Auto — If Equipped iPhone’s features: Android Auto allows you to use your voice to inter- • Phone act with Android’s best-in-class speech technology • Music through your vehicle’s voice recognition system, • Messages and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your Android powered smartphone and a number of its • Maps apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect • Additional Apps your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon that Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supple- begin Android Auto. ment for further information. 289 General Information Uconnect System Support: The following regulatory statement applies to all • U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week) vehicle: • Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS stan- 1-800-387-9983 (French) dard(s). Operation is subject to the following two SiriusXM Guardian services support: MULTIMEDIA conditions: • U.S. residents visit siriusxm.com/guardian or 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, call: 1-844-796-4827 and • Canadian residents visit 2. This device must accept any interference re- www.siriusxm.com/guardian/ca or ceived, including interference that may cause call: 1-877-324-9091 undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Additional Information © 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trade- marks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. 290 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...... 292 Customer Assistance For The Hearing In The 50 United States And FCA US LLC Customer Center ...... 292 Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ...... 293 Washington, D.C...... 294 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center ...... 292 Service Contract ...... 293 In Canada ...... 294 In Mexico Contact...... 292 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . .294 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . .294 Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands...... 292

291 IF YOU NEED Any communication to the manufacturer's cus- In Mexico Contact tomer center should include the following informa- Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 ASSISTANCE tion: The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vi- • Owner's name and address Sante Fe C.P. 05109 tally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to Mexico, D. F. be happy with our products and services. • Owner's telephone number (home and office) In Mexico City: 5081-7568 Warranty service must be done by an authorized • Authorized dealer name dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your • Vehicle delivery date and mileage vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands get prompt and high quality service. The manufac- FCA US LLC Customer Center Customer Service Chrysler International Services turer's authorized dealer have the facilities, factory- LLC trained technicians, special tools, and the latest in- P.O. Box 21–8004 P.O. Box 191857 formation to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 and in a timely manner. CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE San Juan 00919-1857 Phone: (800) 247-9753 This is why you should always talk to an authorized Tel.:(787) 782-5757 dealer service manager first. Most matters can be FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center resolved with this process. Fax: (787) 782-3345 P.O. Box 1621 • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 dealer. They want to know if you need assistance. Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / • If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the (800) 387-9983 French concern, you may contact the manufacturer's cus- tomer center.

292 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Service Contract We appreciate that you have made a major invest- Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ment when you purchased the vehicle. An autho- You may have purchased a service contract for a rized dealer has also made a major investment in To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Tele- unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. communication Devices for the Deaf) equipment Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufac- You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to at its customer center. Any hearing or speech im- turer stands behind only the manufacturer's service resolve any warranty issues or related concerns. paired customer, who has access to a TDD or a contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an WARNING! States, can communicate with the manufacturer by Owner Identification Card in the mail within three dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that re- questions about the service contract, call the manu- only), some of its constituents, and certain ve- quire assistance can use the special needs relay facturer's Service Contract National Customer hicle components contain, or emit, chemicals service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletype- Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call known to the State of California to cause cancer writer users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French). and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and The manufacturer will not stand behind any service operator. certain products of component wear contain, or contract that is not the manufacturer's service con- emit, chemicals known to the State of California tract. It is not responsible for any service contract to cause cancer and birth defects, or other repro- other than the manufacturer's service contract. If ductive harm. you purchased a service contract that is not a manu- facturer's service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited War- ranty expires, please refer to the contract docu- ments, and contact the person listed in those docu- ments.

293 REPORTING SAFETY To contact NHTSA, you may call the PUBLICATION ORDER DEFECTS Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at FORMS 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or In The 50 United States And • You can purchase a copy of the Owner's Manual, go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or Warranty Booklet. Washington, D.C. Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey United States customers may visit the Chrysler Con- If you believe that your vehicle has a defect Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, tact Us page at www.chrysler.com scroll to the bot- tom of the page and select the “Contact Us” link, that could cause a crash or cause injury or D.C. 20590. Youcan also obtain other infor- then select the “Owner’s Manual and Glove Com- death, you should immediately inform the mation about motor vehicle safety from partment Material” from the left menu. You can National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis- http://www.safercar.gov. also purchase a copy by calling 1-800-247-9753 tration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada). In Canada FCA US LLC. • Replacement User Guide kits or DVDs or, if you If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it If you believe that your vehicle has a safety prefer, additional printed copies of the Owner's defect, you should contact the Customer Manual, Warranty Booklet or Radio Manuals may be may open an investigation, and if it finds purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com or by CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE that a safety defect exists in a group of Service Department immediately. calling 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy Canadian customers who wish to report a (Canada). Visa, Master Card, American Express campaign. However, NHTSA cannot safety defect to the Canadian government and Discover orders are accepted. become involved in individual problems should contact Transport Canada, Motor NOTE: between you, your authorized dealer or VehicleDefect Investigations and Recalls at • The Owner's Manual and User Guide electronic FCA US LLC. 1-800-333-0510 or go to files are also available on the Chrysler, Jeep, Ram http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/. Truck, Dodge and SRT websites. • Click on the “For Owners” tab, select “Owner/ Service Manuals”, then select your desired model year and vehicle from the drop down lists.

294 INDEX Accessories ...... 230 Air Conditioning, Rear Zone...... 60 Saving Feature (Protection) ...... 49 Mopar...... 230 Air Conditioning System ...... 57 Belts, Seat ...... 138 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Air Pressure, Tires ...... 215 Blind Spot Monitoring ...... 88 Off...... 149 Alarm B-Pillar Location...... 210 On...... 149 Arm The System ...... 29 Brake Fluid ...... 230 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Disarm The System ...... 30 Brake System (Cruise Control) ...... 149 Alarm (Security Alarm) ...... 80 Fluid Check ...... 230 Additives, Fuel...... 170 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...... 227 Parking ...... 143 AirBag...... 108 Anti-Lock Warning Light...... 80 Warning Light ...... 77 Air Bag Operation ...... 109 Audio Jack...... 241 Bulb Replacement ...... 174 Air Bag Warning Light ...... 106, 110 Automatic Dimming Mirror ...... 45 Bulbs, Light ...... 140, 174 Driver Knee Air Bag ...... 114 Automatic Headlights ...... 47 Enhanced Accident Response .....118, 198 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .....57 Camera ...... 164 Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...... 198 Automatic Transaxle...... 145 Camera, Rear ...... 164, 165 FrontAirBag...... 110 Automatic Transmission Capacities, Fluid...... 227 If A Deployment Occurs ...... 117 Adding Fluid ...... 230 Caps, Filler Knee Impact Bolsters ...... 114 Fluid Type ...... 230 Fuel...... 167, 194 Maintaining Your Air Bag System ...... 118 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet)....69 Carbon Monoxide Warning ...... 137 Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .....107 Auxiliary Power Outlet ...... 69 Changing A Flat Tire...... 182, 205 Side Air Bags ...... 114 Axle Lubrication...... 230 Chart, Tire Sizing ...... 206 Transporting Pets ...... 137 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety...... 137 Air Bag Light ...... 77, 106, 138 Back-Up ...... 164 Checks, Safety ...... 137 Air Bag Maintenance ...... 118 Battery ...... 78 Child Restraint ...... 119 Air Conditioning Filter ...... 62 Charging System Light ...... 78 Child Restraints Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ...... 62 Jump Starting ...... 191 Booster Seats ...... 122 295 Center Seat LATCH ...... 128 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ...... 50 Oil Selection ...... 227 Child Restraints ...... 119 Diagnostic System, Onboard ...... 85 Overheating ...... 194 Child Seat Installation ...... 130, 132 Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...... 46 Starting ...... 142 How ToStow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . .129 Disabled Vehicle Towing ...... 196 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . .118, 198 INDEX Infants And Child Restraints ...... 121 Disturb ...... 281 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 137 Lower Anchors And TethersFor Children .124 Door Ajar...... 80 Exhaust System ...... 137 Older Children And Child Restraints . . . .122 Door Ajar Light ...... 80 Exterior Lighting ...... 46 Seating Positions ...... 123 Driver's Seat Back Tilt ...... 36 Exterior Lights ...... 46, 140, 174 Using The TopTetherAnchorage ...... 134 DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) . .260 Cleaning Filters Wheels ...... 220 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . .69 Air Conditioning ...... 62 Climate Control ...... 52 Electric Parking Brake ...... 143 Engine Oil ...... 228 Manual ...... 52 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control). . .147 Flashers ...... 174 CompactSpareTire...... 219 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . .79 Hazard Warning ...... 174 Connector Emergency, In Case Of Turn Signal ...... 46, 84, 140 UCI...... 259 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 174 Flash-To-Pass ...... 46, 47 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . .259 Jacking ...... 182, 183, 205 Fluid, Brake ...... 230 Contract, Service ...... 293 Jump Starting ...... 191 Fluid Capacities ...... 227 Cooling System Overheating ...... 194 Fluid Leaks ...... 140 Coolant Capacity ...... 227 Towing ...... 196 Fluids And Lubricants ...... 228 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . .227, 228 Engine Fog Lights ...... 46, 48 Cruise Light ...... 84, 85 Break-In Recommendations ...... 143 Folding Rear Seat...... 36 Customer Assistance ...... 292 Compartment ...... 204 Forward Collision Warning ...... 91 Customer Programmable Features ...... 249 Compartment Identification ...... 204 Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...... 174 Coolant (Antifreeze) ...... 228 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...... 194 Daytime Running Lights ...... 46 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 137 Fuel Defroster, Windshield ...... 138 Oil...... 227, 228 Additives ...... 170 296 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...... 167 Instrument Cluster ...... 84 Liftgate ...... 67 Materials Added ...... 170 Instrument Cluster Display Light Bulbs...... 140 Octane Rating ...... 228 Information Display ...... 74 Lights ...... 140 Specifications ...... 228 Interior And Instrument Lights ...... 49 AirBag...... 77, 106, 138 TankCapacity ...... 227 Interior Lights...... 49 Automatic Headlights ...... 47 Fuses ...... 176 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...... 50 Battery Saver ...... 46, 49 Introduction ...... 1 Brake Warning ...... 77 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap)...... 167 Inverter, Power ...... 71 Bulb Replacement ...... 174 iPod/USB/MP3 Control...... 259 Cruise ...... 84, 85 Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect) ...... 276 Bluetooth Streaming Audio ...... 276 Daytime Running ...... 46 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 174 Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...... 46 Headlights Jack Operation ...... 182, 205 Engine Temperature Warning ...... 78 Delay ...... 46 Jump Starting ...... 191 Exterior ...... 140 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ....46 Fog...... 48 Lights On Reminder ...... 46, 48 KeyFob...... 22 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 174 Passing ...... 46, 47 Arm The Alarm ...... 29 Headlights ...... 46 Switch ...... 46 Disarm The Alarm ...... 30 Headlights On Reminder ...... 46, 48 Time Delay ...... 46, 48 Keys...... 22 Headlight Switch ...... 46 Washers ...... 48 High Beam ...... 46 Head Restraints...... 40 Lane Change And Turn Signals ...... 46 High Beam/Low Beam Select ...... 46 Heated Mirrors ...... 45 Lane Change Assist ...... 46, 49 Instrument Cluster ...... 46 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) LaneSense ...... 162 Interior ...... 49 Switch ...... 46 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 98 Lights On Reminder ...... 46, 48 HoodProp...... 65 Latches ...... 140 Park...... 84 Hood Release...... 65 Hood...... 65 Passing ...... 46, 47 Leaks, Fluid ...... 140 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 77 Inside Rearview Mirror ...... 45 Life Of Tires ...... 217 Security Alarm ...... 80 297 Service ...... 174 Navigation ...... 275 Placard, Tire And Loading Information .....210 SmartBeams ...... 47 New Vehicle Break-In Period ...... 143 Power Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . .82, 92 Inverter ...... 71 Turn Signal ...... 46, 84, 140 Occupant Restraints ...... 96 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .....69 INDEX Warning Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel)...... 228 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...... 103 (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .78, 84 Oil, Engine ...... 228 Preparation For Jacking ...... 182 Loading Vehicle Capacity ...... 227 Pretensioners Tires...... 210 Filter ...... 228 Seat Belts ...... 103 Low Tire Pressure System ...... 92 Pressure Warning Light ...... 79 LugNuts...... 226 Recommendation ...... 227 Radial Ply Tires ...... 215 Viscosity ...... 227 Radio Maintenance Schedule ...... 200 Oil Pressure Light ...... 79 Presets ...... 240 Manual, Service ...... 294 Onboard Diagnostic System ...... 85 Radio Frequency Memory Feature (Memory Seat) ...... 36 Operating Precautions ...... 85 General Information ...... 25, 29 Memory Seat ...... 36 Outside Rearview Mirrors ...... 45 Radio Screens ...... 236 Memory Seats And Radio ...... 36 Overheating, Engine ...... 194 Rear Air Conditioning ...... 60 Mirrors ...... 45 Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) ...... 294 Rear Camera ...... 164, 165 Automatic Dimming ...... 45 RearCrossPath...... 88, 89 Heated ...... 45 Parking Brake ...... 143 Rear ParkSense System...... 154, 157 Outside ...... 45 ParkSense Active Park Assist ...... 161 Rear Seat, Folding ...... 36 Rearview ...... 45 ParkSense System, Rear ...... 154, 157 Recreational Towing ...... 170 Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...... 92 Personalized Menu Bar ...... 238 Release, Hood ...... 65 Mopar...... 230 Pets...... 137 Reminder, Lights On ...... 46 Mopar Accessories ...... 230 Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) ...... 276 Reminder, Seat Belt...... 97 Multi-Function Control Lever ...... 46 Phone (Pairing) ...... 277 Remote Control Phone (Uconnect) ...... 276 Starting System ...... 28

298 Remote Keyless Entry Seat Belt Pretensioner ...... 103 Arm The System ...... 29 Arm The Alarm ...... 29 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 97 Disarm The System ...... 30 Disarm The Alarm ...... 30 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 97 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...... 228 Remote Starting System ...... 28 Seat Belts...... 97, 138 Service Assistance ...... 292 Replacement Bulbs ...... 174 Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...... 100 Service Contract...... 293 Replacement Tires ...... 217 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . .100 Service Manuals ...... 294 Reporting Safety Defects ...... 294 Child Restraint ...... 119 Shoulder Belts ...... 98 Restraint, Head ...... 40 Extender ...... 103 Side View Mirror Adjustment ...... 45 Restraints, Child ...... 119 Front Seat ...... 97, 98, 99 Signals, Turn ...... 46, 84, 140 Inspection ...... 138 Sirius Satellite Radio Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...... 138 Operating Instructions ...... 99 Traffic & Weather ...... 275 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...... 140 Pregnant Women ...... 103 Sirius Travel Link...... 275 Safety Defects, Reporting...... 294 Pretensioners ...... 103 SiriusXM Guardian ...... 251 Safety, Exhaust Gas ...... 137 Rear Seat ...... 98 Account ...... 251 Safety Information, Tire ...... 205 Reminder ...... 77 In Vehicle Features ...... 255 Safety Tips ...... 137 Untwisting Procedure ...... 100 Maintaining Your Account ...... 255 Schedule, Maintenance ...... 200 Seats...... 36, 37 Registration ...... 252 Seat Belt Adjustment ...... 36 Remote Features ...... 257 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt EasyEntry...... 36 Renewing Subscriptions ...... 255 Anchorage ...... 100 Heated ...... 36, 37 Send&Go...... 259 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . .104 Memory ...... 36 Vehicle Finder ...... 259 Energy Management Feature ...... 104 Rear Folding ...... 36 Vehicle Health Alert ...... 287 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ...... 99 Seatback Release ...... 36 SmartBeams ...... 47 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 98 Tilting ...... 36 Snow Tires ...... 218 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...... 100 Vented ...... 36 Sound Systems (Radio) ...... 241 Pregnant Women ...... 103 Ventilated ...... 36 SpareTire...... 219, 220 Seat Belt Extender ...... 103 Security Alarm ...... 80 Spark Plugs ...... 228 299 Specifications System, Remote Starting ...... 28 Snow Tires ...... 218 Fuel (Gasoline) ...... 228 SpareTire...... 219, 220 Oil...... 228 TelescopingSteering Column ...... 43 Spinning ...... 216 Speed Control Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ....57 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 216 INDEX Accel/Decel ...... 149, 151 TextMessaging ...... 281 Wheel Nut Torque ...... 226 Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ...... 150 Tilt Steering Column ...... 43 Tire Safety Information ...... 205 Cancel ...... 149 Time Delay, Headlight ...... 46 Tire Service Kit ...... 186 Distance Setting (ACC Only) ...... 152 Tire And Loading Information Placard .....210 ToOpen Hood ...... 65 Mode Setting (ACC Only) ...... 152 Tire Markings ...... 205 Towing ...... 170 Resume ...... 149 Tires...... 140, 214, 219, 222 Disabled Vehicle ...... 196 Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 147 Aging (Life Of Tires) ...... 217 Recreational ...... 170 Starting...... 28, 142 Air Pressure ...... 214 TowingVehicle Behind A Motorhome .....170 Remote ...... 28 Changing ...... 182, 205 Trailer Towing ...... 170 Starting And Operating ...... 142 CompactSpare...... 219 Transaxle ...... 145 Starting Procedures ...... 142 General Information ...... 214, 219 Automatic ...... 145 Steering High Speed ...... 215 Operation ...... 145 Column Controls ...... 46 Inflation Pressures ...... 215 Transporting Pets ...... 137 Tilt Column ...... 43 Jacking ...... 182, 183, 205 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 216 Wheel, Heated ...... 43, 44 Life Of Tires ...... 217 Turn Signals...... 46, 84 Wheel, Tilt ...... 43 Load Capacity ...... 210, 211 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ...... 92 UCI Connector ...... 259 Controls ...... 250 Pressure Warning Light ...... 82 Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone) Storage, Vehicle ...... 62 Quality Grading ...... 222 Making A Phone Call ...... 276, 280 Stuck, Freeing ...... 194 Radial ...... 215 Receiving A Call ...... 276 SunRoof...... 63 Replacement ...... 217 Uconnect Phone ...... 276, 280, 281 Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag. . . .108 Safety ...... 205, 214 Uconnect Voice Command ...... 280, 283 Sizes ...... 206 Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...... 222 300 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) IVH...... 20 Wheel And Wheel Trim ...... 220 Connector ...... 259 Navigation ...... 20 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ...... 220 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ...... 100 Operating Instructions ...... 20 Wind Buffeting ...... 64 USBPort...... 241 Searching User Guide ...... 20 Window Fogging ...... 62 Voice Command ...... 280 Windshield Defroster ...... 138 Vehicle Loading ...... 211 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . .280, 281, 283 Windshield Washers ...... 50 Vehicle Storage ...... 62 Wipers, Intermittent ...... 50 Vehicle User Guide Warning Flasher, Hazard ...... 174 Wrecker Towing ...... 196 ICON Symbol Glossary ...... 20 Warning Lights In Vehicle Help ...... 20 (Instrument Cluster Description) ...... 81

301 302 303 304 The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly acquainted with your new Chrysler brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that common questions. However, it is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual. may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation For complete operational instructions, maintenance procedures and important safety messages, please consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous manuals found on the website on the back cover and other Warning Labels in your vehicle. and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws. www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Chrysler brand dealer.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL: Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired IMPORTANT: Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/ with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca or use public transportation. (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle. WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident, or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only). www.chrysler.com/en/owners (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) provides special offers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries, personalized service records and more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often. Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.

Download a FREE electronic copy of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, media and warranty booklet by visiting: www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owner-manual.html (U.S. residents); PACIFICA HYBRID PACIFICA www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents). CHRYSLER PACIFICA HYBRID Chrysler.com (U.S.) (Canada) 2018 USER GUIDE Chrysler.ca FIRST EDITION • USER GUIDE 18RUPHEV-926-AA • 18RUPHEV-926-AA

©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.